First Edition
24_RUP_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app,
select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler”
(U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
U.S.
mopar.com/om
2024 CHRYSLER PACIFICA OWNER’S MANUAL
2024 PACIFICA
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual
for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US
LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall
be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important
features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio
Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website
on the back cover.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are
less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking,
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a
cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-800-247-9753
or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 13 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 99 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .......................................................... 119 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 169 5
6 SAFETY.................................................................................. 194 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................. 241 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................... 264 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 309 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................. 315
10
11 INDEX ................................................................................... 320
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ...................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ................13
Battery Conditioning ................14
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION ....... 15
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet ............. 15
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp) ..... 15
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt, 32 Amp) ..... 16
Vehicle Charge Indicators ............. 17
Hybrid Electric App .................18
KEYS ........................... 20
KeyFob ....................... 20
SENTRY KEY ....................... 22
IGNITION SWITCH ....................23
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 23
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition — Hybrid
Models Only .................... 24
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............ 25
How To Use Remote Start ............. 25
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............ 26
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .....................26
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 26
Remote Start Windshield Wiper
De-Icer Activation — If Equipped .........27
Remote Start Cancel Message .......... 27
REMOTE START SYSTEM (BEV) — IF EQUIPPED . . . 27
How To Use Remote Start .............27
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............ 28
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning (SCC) .......28
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..... 29
To Arm The System ................ 30
To Disarm The System ............... 30
Rearming Of The System .............30
Security System Manual Override ........30
DOORS ..........................30
Manual Door Locks ................. 30
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 31
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...... 31
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped . 33
Manual Sliding Side Door ............. 33
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ..... 34
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped ....35
Child Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ........................ 35
STEERING WHEEL ................... 36
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ......... 36
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 36
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ....37
Programming The Memory Feature ........ 37
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory . 37
Memory Position Recall .............. 38
SEATS ..........................38
Manual Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . 38
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats .........39
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . . 49
Power Adjustment Rear Seats — If Equipped . . 50
Heated Seats .................... 52
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......... 53
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks ....... 53
Head Restraints .................. 53
Uconnect Voice Recognition — If Equipped......55
Introducing Voice Recognition ........... 55
Basic Voice Commands .............. 55
Get Started .....................
55
Additional Information ...............56
MIRRORS ........................ 56
InsideRearviewMirror ............... 56
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....57
Outside Mirrors ................... 57
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped ...............57
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped ..................... 57
Conversation Mirror ................57
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 57
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . 58
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . 58
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ......... 58
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..........58
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ....59
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............. 59
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 59
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 59
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 59
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................ 60
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 60
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 61
2
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..... 61
Security ....................... 61
Troubleshooting Tips ................ 61
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................62
Multifunction Lever .................62
Headlight Switch .................. 62
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . 63
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 63
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ....... 63
Flash-To-Pass ....................63
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ....... 64
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped .... 64
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ....... 64
Lights-On Reminder ................ 64
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ..........64
Turn Signals ..................... 64
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........ 65
Battery Saver ....................65
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................65
Interior Courtesy Lights .............. 65
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ........ 66
Windshield Wiper Operation ............66
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........ 67
Rear Wiper And Washer ..............67
CLIMATE CONTROLS .................. 67
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 67
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ................... 72
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................... 76
Climate Voice Commands ............. 76
Operating Tips ...................76
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 77
Storage ....................... 77
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ........ 79
Sun Screens — If Equipped ............ 79
USB/AUX Control .................. 80
Power Outlets .................... 81
Power Inverter — If Equipped ........... 83
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...... 83
WINDOWS ........................84
PowerWindows ..................84
Automatic Window Features ........... 85
ResetAuto-Up .................... 85
WindBuffeting ................... 85
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....... 85
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ........ 86
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade —
If Equipped .....................86
Pinch Protect Feature ............... 86
Venting Sunroof ...................87
Ignition Off Operation ............... 87
Sunroof Maintenance ...............87
HOOD ........................... 87
Opening ....................... 87
Closing ........................ 88
LIFTGATE ......................... 88
T
o Unlock/Open The Liftgate ........... 88
To Lock/Close The Liftgate ............ 88
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........... 88
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ........ 89
Cargo Area Features ................91
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED ....95
Deploying The Crossbars ............. 95
Stowing The Crossbars ............... 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................. 99
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........ 101
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID MODELS .... 102
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........ 103
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..........103
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ......................104
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon .....104
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As
Possible ...................... 104
Engine Oil Life .................. 105
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 105
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped .............. 110
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........111
Red Warning Lights ...............111
Yellow Warning Lights .............. 113
Yellow Indicator Lights .............. 116
Green Indicator Lights .............. 116
White Indicator Lights .............. 117
Blue Indicator Lights ............... 117
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 117
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ................... 118
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...................... 118
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................119
Normal Starting ................. 119
AutoPark ...................... 119
Extended Park Starting .............. 121
If Engine Fails To Start .............. 121
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............122
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .... 122
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button ............... 122
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID ......... 122
Normal Starting .................122
AutoPark .....................123
After Starting ...................125
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ............... 125
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 125
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 126
PARKING BRAKE ................... 126
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............126
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............. 128
IgnitionParkInterlock ..............129
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ......................129
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 129
Gear Ranges ................... 129
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — HYBRID ...... 131
IgnitionParkInterlock .............. 132
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ....................... 132
Hybrid Transmission ............... 132
Gear Ranges .................... 132
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ..... 134
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ............134
POWER STEERING ..................134
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........135
AutostopMode ..................135
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 135
To Start The Engine While In Autostop ..... 136
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 136
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . 136
System Malfunction ............... 136
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 136
Cruise Control ...................137
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......... 138
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 145
ParkSense Sensors ................145
ParkSense Display ................ 145
ParkSense Warning Display ...........148
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .......148
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 148
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 148
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 148
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................149
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System ............ 150
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ............... 150
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............152
LaneSense Operation .............. 152
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......... 153
LaneSense Warning Message .......... 153
Changing LaneSense Status ...........154
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........154
SURR
OUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................155
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......... 157
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............157
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID MODELS
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................... 158
VEHICLE LOADING ...................160
Certification Label ................ 160
TRAILER TOWING ................... 160
CommonTowingDefinitions ........... 161
Trailer Hitch Classification ............ 162
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ....... 162
Vehicle Loading Chart ..............163
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 164
Towing Requirements .............. 164
TowingTips .................... 166
TRAILER TOWING — HYBRID
MODELS (IF EQUIPPED) ............... 166
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ............... 167
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 167
DRIVING TIPS...................... 168
Driving On Slippery Surfaces .......... 168
Driving Through Water .............. 168
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .................169
CYBERSECURITY ...................169
UCONNECT SETTINGS ................. 169
Customer Programmable Features ....... 169
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ........ 185
Radio Operation .................. 185
MediaMode .................... 185
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED .....185
Overview ......................185
Getting Started ..................186
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Fire TV built-in from the Front Radio Screen . . 186
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Fire TV built-in from the Rear Screens ..... 186
First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear
Screens) ...................... 186
Alexa Voice Control ................ 187
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers ........... 187
QuickMenu .................... 187
Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens) . . 187
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
(Using the Rear Screens) .............187
Media Sources Input (Using the Front
Radio and Rear Screens) ............ 188
VoiceRemotewithAlexa .............188
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
streaming (Using the Front Radio and Rear
Screens) ...................... 189
Play A Blu-ray™ or DVD — If Equipped ..... 190
Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear
Screens) ...................... 190
UsingTheVideoUSBPort ............190
PlayVideoGames ................. 191
Headphones Operation .............. 191
Rear Climate Controls .............. 191
Legal & Compliance ...............193
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 193
Regulatory And Safety Information .......193
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES...................194
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........194
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) ...... 194
Audible Pedestrian Warning System ...... 195
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 195
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............ 199
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 199
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............. 202
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 205
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........207
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....207
Important Safety Precautions .......... 207
Seat Belt Systems ................ 208
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .... 216
Child Restraints .................225
SAFETY TIPS ......................238
Transporting Passengers ............. 238
Transporting Pets ................ 238
Connected Vehicles ................ 238
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle .................... 238
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ............239
Exhaust Gas ................... 240
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...........240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........... 241
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 241
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . 244
Preparations For Jacking ............ 244
Jack And Spare Tire Location .......... 244
EquipmentRemoval ...............244
Jacking Instructions ............... 245
Road Tire Installation ............... 248
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped ..... 249
Return Inflatable Spare Tire ........... 250
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .......... 250
JUMP STARTING — GAS MODELS ..........254
Preparations For Jump Start — Gas Models . . 255
Jump Starting Procedure — Gas Models .... 255
JUMP STARTING — HYBRID MODELS ........256
Preparations For Jump Start — Hybrid Models . 257
Jump Starting Procedure — Hybrid Models . . . 258
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ....258
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............ 259
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............... 260
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............. 261
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........261
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models .........263
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................... 263
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 263
5
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ...............264
Maintenance Plan ................ 264
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 266
3.6L Engine .................... 266
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID MODELS
(IF EQUIPPED) ................... 267
Checking Oil Level ................ 268
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 268
Maintenance-Free Battery ............ 268
Pressure Washing .................269
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ...............269
Engine Oil ..................... 269
Engine Oil Filter .................. 270
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............. 270
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ......... 270
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 271
Body Lubrication ................. 272
Windshield Wiper Blades ............ 273
Exhaust System ................. 275
Cooling System ..................276
Cooling System — Hybrid Models
(If Equipped) ................... 278
Brake System ...................281
Automatic Transmission ............. 281
Fuses ....................... 282
Bulb Replacement ................289
TIRES ..........................291
TireSafetyInformation ............. 291
Tires — General Information ........... 297
Tire Types .....................300
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............ 300
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........... 301
Snow Traction Devices .............. 302
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 304
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................304
Treadwear .....................304
Traction Grades .................. 304
Temperature Grades ............... 305
STORING THE VEHICLE ................ 305
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID MODELS
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................... 305
BODYWORK....................... 306
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....306
Body And Underbody Maintenance ....... 306
Preserving The Bodywork ............ 306
INTERIORS .......................307
Seats And Fabric Parts .............. 307
Plastic And Coated Parts ............. 307
Leather Surfaces ................. 308
Glass Surfaces .................. 308
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ......309
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 309
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 309
Torque Specifications ............... 309
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................ 310
3.6L Engine ....................310
Reformulated Gasoline ............. 310
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........... 310
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . 311
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ....311
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline ................ 311
Materials Added To Fuel .............311
Fuel System Cautions ...............311
FLUID CAPACITIES ...................312
FLUID CAPACITIES — HYBRID ............ 312
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .........313
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — HYBRID . . . 313
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 314
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — HYBRID . . 314
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..................315
Prepare For The Appointment .......... 315
Prepare A List ................... 315
Be Reasonable With Requests ......... 315
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............. 315
Roadside Assistance ...............315
FCA US LLC Customer Center .......... 316
FCA Canada Customer Care ........... 316
Mexico ....................... 316
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........ 316
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ........... 316
Service Contract ................. 317
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............. 317
MOPAR®PARTS.................... 317
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............ 317
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . 317
In Canada ..................... 318
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............ 318
Change Of Ownership Or Address .......... 318
GENERAL INFORMATION ...............318
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 111.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 111
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 111
Brake Warning Light
page 111
8 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
page 111
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
page 112
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 112
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 112
Hood Open Warning Light
page 112
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 112
Red Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 112
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 112
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 113
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 113
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 113
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service Warning Light
page 113
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
page 113
Torque Limited Warning Light
page 113
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
page 114
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
page 114
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 113
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 114
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 114
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
page 114
Fuel Level Sensor Fail Warning Light
page 115
LaneSense Warning Light
page 114
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 114
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 115
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Service AWD Warning Light
page 115
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
page 115
Service LaneSense Warning Light
page 115
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 115
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 115
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) OFF Indicator Light
page 116
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Indi-
cator Light
page 116
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 116
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
page 116
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 116
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 116
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 116
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Green Indicator Lights
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 116
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 116
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
page 117
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
page 117
Plug Status Indicator Light
page 117
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
page 117
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 117
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 117
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
page 117
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 117
12 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the middle
section of the vehicle, below and in front of the second
row seating. The high voltage battery is maintenance
free and designed to last for the life of the vehicle.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
•
Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
•
Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
•
Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
•
Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis-
charged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the access panel, in front of the second row
passenger seating. Only a qualified service technician
should access the high voltage battery service
disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
•
Never try to remove the high voltage battery ser-
vice disconnect. The high voltage battery service
disconnect is used when your vehicle requires ser-
vice by a qualified technician at an authorized
dealership. Failure to follow this warning can result
in electrical shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other
hazards which can cause death or serious injury
including severe burns, respiratory injuries, and
blindness.
•
The high voltage battery and battery case have no
parts that you or an unqualified technician can
service. Under no circumstances should you or an
unqualified technician open, disassemble, pen-
etrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery, bat-
tery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage to
these components can result in electrical shock,
toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness. You
should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer-
ship for any service or maintenance on these high
voltage components.
•
The high voltage system can be hot during and
after starting, and when the vehicle is shut off or
charging. Be careful of both the high voltage and
the high temperature. Failure to do so can result in
severe burns.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement.
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high volt-
age battery. If the battery is disposed of improperly,
there is a risk of electrical shock and toxic emissions
which can cause severe burns, respiratory injuries,
fires, and other hazards resulting in serious injury or
death.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Manage-
ment system that is designed to:
•
Ensure safe operation
•
Maximize driving range
•
Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
13
2
NOTE:
•
During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking
noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the high volt-
age battery contactors inside the battery are closed
to make the stored electricity inside available for
vehicle use. After the vehicle is shut down, the con-
tactors open to electrically isolate the battery from
other vehicle systems. The clicking noise is the
sound of these contactors as they open and close
during normal operation.
•
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system will emit a
noise from the front of the vehicle when driving for-
ward at speeds below 22 mph (35 km/h). It will also
emit a noise from the rear of the vehicle when in
REVERSE, and from both the front and rear of the
vehicle when in NEUTRAL. For more information on
this system, see
page 195.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
•
If your vehicle is still drivable, pull off to the side of
the road, when safe to do so, and place the trans-
mission in the PARK position, apply the parking
brake, and turn the vehicle off.
•
Beware of any exposed high-voltage parts or
cables. To avoid electrical shock which can result
in serious injury or death, never touch wiring, con-
nectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as the
inverter unit and the Lithium-ion battery.
•
Leaks or damage to the Lithium-ion battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact emergency services immediately.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Since the fluid leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
•
If a fire occurs inside your vehicle, leave the
vehicle as soon as possible. Only use a type ABC,
BC, or C fire extinguisher that is meant for use on
electrical fires. Using a small amount of water, or
the incorrect fire extinguisher can result in serious
injury or death from electrical shock.
•
If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due
to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle and contact emergency services.
Advise first responders that this is a electric
vehicle.
•
In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
BATTERY CONDITIONING
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below at
vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Plug In Vehicle For Battery Conditioning”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
•
If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery tempera-
tures, the instrument cluster will display the mes-
sage “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery Condition-
ing Needed”.
•
If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery tem-
peratures, the “Plug In Vehicle To Condition Battery”
will be shown in the instrument cluster display.
•
If the battery temperature is below -27°F (-33°C),
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” will be displayed whether the
vehicle is plugged in or not.
NOTE:
•
When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery Con-
ditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep the
ignition in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the ignition back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
•
Under these high or low temperatures, if the vehicle
is plugged in, and the ignition is in the OFF position,
the vehicle may “wake up” to precondition the high
voltage battery for use.
•
It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
The messages will only be displayed when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position and the high voltage battery
is not ready to provide propulsion power. The message
also displays if there is a failed attempt to achieve
READY state when the high voltage battery cell tem-
peratures are either too cold or too hot.
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 CHARGING INLET
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE
J1772 charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC
Level 1 (120 V), and AC Level 2 (240 V) charging.
Open the charge port door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the charge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer edge near the center.
AC LEVEL 1 CHARGING (120 VOLT,
12 AMP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE
J1772 Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE), also referred to as a Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE). AC Level 1 charging requires a conventional
NEMA 5-15R 120 Volt AC grounded wall outlet along
with the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) provided
with the vehicle.
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow these warnings. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death.
•
Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
in building structures that use fuse-based circuit
protection. Use only with electrical circuits pro-
tected by circuit breakers.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
•
When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
•
Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
•
Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
immediately if charging stops before it’s completed
when the plug or cord is moved or adjusted.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the plug has a loose connection with the wall out-
let or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
•
If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
•
Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the Por-
table Charging Cordset has been damaged in any
manner. It is recommended that you contact an
authorized dealership.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle Warranty.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Electrical shock, fire, and other
serious hazards can occur if the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not used properly. This vehicle uses
a high voltage current. Failure to follow the proper
charging instructions in this publication can cause
serious injury or death. There are no serviceable
parts in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not
open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to follow
this warning can result in electrical shock, fire, prop-
erty damage, and death or serious injury.
To access the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE), open
the door of the cargo area storage bin if equipped, on
the driver’s side, and remove the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) from the storage bag.
Vehicle Charge Inlet
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
NOTE:
After use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage bag and put back in the cargo
area storage bin if equipped. If the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) will be left outside the vehicle, be sure
to protect the connection end from moisture, dirt, and
debris accumulation and contamination.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
WARNING!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO
A RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK: This publica-
tion contains important instructions and warnings
that should be followed during charging operations.
Failure to follow these warnings and instructions can
result in electrical shock and fire which can cause
death or serious injury.
•
Read this entire publication before using the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE).
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not put fingers or objects into the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) connector.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the flexible power cord is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation, or any other signs of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the enclosure or the connector is broken, cracked,
open, or shows any other indication of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may attempt
to reset and run after a power interruption.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) yourself – personal injury may result.
•
When using a charging station with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) attached, ensure the
charging station’s cable is not visibly damaged
before plugging into the vehicle.
•
Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is man-
datory when children are in proximity to the charge
station that is in use.
•
Do not use a charge station or vehicle charge inlet
that is worn or damaged with the AC Level 2 charg-
ing cable. Plugging into worn or damaged recep-
tacles may cause damage to the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Ensure that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose the
EVSE J1772 vehicle connector to rain or wet condi-
tions. Avoid allowing water or other liquids to pour
or drip onto the vehicle connection end of the
J1772 EVSE connector. If water penetrates the
electrical device, the risk of electrical shock
increases. Ensure that all plugs and cables are
free of moisture before using the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE).
•
In a collision, a loose Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) on the cargo load floor, or in the passenger
compartment.
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
tested for use in temperatures ranging from -40°F
to 122°F (-40°C to 50°C).
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
stored at temperatures between -40°F and 176°F
(-40°C and 80°C).
•
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
AC LEVEL 2 CHARGING
(240 VOLT, 32 AMP)
AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level
2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging
station. A 32 Amp Level 2 EVSE for home installation is
recommended. The Level 2 EVSE connects to a 40 Amp
circuit breaker and delivers 32 Amp maximum to the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage Bin
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When using public charging stations, ensure the charg-
ing station is ready to provide charge and the vehicle is
in PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged into the
vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and is coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
•
Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
•
Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is
currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it for
this charging event by plugging in the charge con-
nector, unplugging it, and then plugging it back into
the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double plug
sequence within 10 seconds for it to override the set
schedule.
•
Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open. Charg-
ing is disabled while the hood is open, and will
resume when the hood closes.
To stop the charging process:
•
Press the button located on the Level 2 EVSE
vehicle connector.
•
Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
•
Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
VEHICLE CHARGE INDICATORS
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Display
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster. The battery display will indicate the
current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage bat-
tery; with the percentage value located to the right of
the symbol. When plugged in, the battery symbol also
indicates the battery level along with messages about
the charge or whether the system is waiting to charge
due to the charge schedule. These will appear unless
there is a charging fault. A green plug telltale will be
shown in the cluster, as well as applicable messaging
when charging.
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display in the instrument clus-
ter, your vehicle is equipped with a visual SOC indicator.
The SOC indicator is made up of five lights that are
mounted to the top center of the instrument panel,
which will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged into
the charging system.
The SOC indicator provides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day of
the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin
charging.
In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on the
SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status is avail-
able in the instrument cluster display. In the event of an
error in the charging process, the outer two lights will
blink.
When the hood is open, the lights on the SOC indicator
will not be illuminated.
High Voltage Battery Display
State Of Charge Indicator
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery
Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 20%
1st light on, 2nd light
blinks
21 – 40%
1st and 2nd lights on,
3rd light blinks
41 – 60%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd lights
on, 4th light blinks
61 – 80%
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
lights on, 5th light blinks
81 – 99%
All 5 lights on 100%
Two outer lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is waiting
for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging
All lights turn on, then
immediately turn off
Indicates a successful
plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated indicating the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates are
used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off indi-
cates that the first half is charging. The blink rate will
increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 second off to indicate
that the second half is charging. When the battery is
fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights remain
illuminated as charging continues.
HYBRID ELECTRIC APP
Within the Uconnect system is the Hybrid Electric App
that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow, under-
stand your driving history, and set a charging schedule
for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To access this
App, press the Apps or Vehicle button on the main
menu bar of the radio’s touchscreen, and locate the
Hybrid Electric App. Accessing the app brings you to a
set of three pages: Power Flow, Driving History, and
Schedules.
Power Flow
The Power Flow screen shows the current power read-
ings for all of the following:
•
Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating
conditions, this power is used to: propel the vehicle,
provide passenger compartment heating, power
vehicle electrical loads, and charge the high voltage
battery. Engine operation is controlled to maximize
fuel economy.
•
Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/
absorbing. A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s
high voltage battery is charging.
•
Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the cur-
rent interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Driving History
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in both Full Electric and Hybrid (battery and engine pow-
ered) modes for both the previous week and the current
week. The data is displayed in a bar graph: Electric
mode in teal and Hybrid mode in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day in
Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below
miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the
week exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values
for miles (km) driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will
be listed above the bar graph in respective colors (teal
for Electric and blue for Hybrid).
Hybrid Electric App Location
Power Flow Screen
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Charging Schedule
To set a charging schedule, select the Hybrid Electric
App in the touchscreen and follow these steps:
1. Select “Schedules”.
2. Select the schedule to be set (1, 2, or 3) by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
screen.
3. Select “Charge Schedule”.
4. Select if Scheduled Charging should “Charge Until
Full”.
5. Set the Charge Start Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
NOTE:
This is to occur every week (as long as the vehicle is
connected to an EVSE).
6. When done, press the X in the upper right hand cor-
ner, then select “yes” to save the charge schedule.
The active schedule will be indicated by the check
mark to the right of the schedule event line. The
event action and time will be displayed.
7. To add another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of three independent Scheduled Charg-
ing events can be scheduled at a given time.
NOTE:
•
If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
•
If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect system (and Charge
Until Full is not selected), the vehicle’s battery will
not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the vehicle is plugged in within the time and day of
Driving History Screen
Schedules Screen
Select Charge Schedule
Set Charge Schedule
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
the week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging
will automatically begin when the selected charge
time/day of the week occurs or whenever the
vehicle is plugged in with no charge schedule set.
•
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks the
driver if they would like to “Charge Now?” and pro-
vides other information, including the next charging
schedule start time and estimated time to charge
the battery to 100%. If within one hour of selecting
“Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE,
the vehicle will immediately begin to charge (tempo-
rarily ignoring any set charge schedule). To fully
deactivate the charge schedule, refer to the “Sched-
ules” feature within the Hybrid Electric App.
•
The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in
a second time to the vehicle. This “double plug
sequence” will override the schedule that is set in
the radio, and begin charging the vehicle immedi-
ately. The double plug sequence must be completed
within 10 seconds for it to override the programmed
schedule.
•
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged, you can select the “Charge Now”
option or use the double plug override option.
NOTE:
For information on jump starting your vehicle,
page 256.
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, optional
power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power
sliding door, from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). When any button on the key fob is pushed, or
when any signal is being transferred between the key
fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will
flash as an indicator. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become
depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
page 83.
•
With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — Panic Alarm
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes,
then the key fob battery requires replacement.
•
The key fob LED light brightness is designed for
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight
page 318.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and the liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp. Settings in the Uconnect system
can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open,
the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again
only if the key fob is inside the passenger
compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
page 169.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old
batteries by placing them in correct containers
according to the law or by taking them to a dealer-
ship, where they will be handled appropriately.
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechani-
cal release button on the side of the key fob with
your thumb and then pulling the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert a coin or a flat-blade screwdriver into the now
exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides to dis-
engage the snaps. Gently remove the back cover
from the fob, being careful not to damage any of the
snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward
in its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the
depleted battery from the battery pocket and dis-
pose appropriately.
Emergency Key Removal
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
4. Fit a new battery ensuring that the positive (+) side
is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket
until it is firmly seated in place and secured under
both tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and
snap it back in place by pushing it against the fob
until it is seated all around.
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
•
It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. If a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off
after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 318.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START,
RUN will illuminate.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ACC
•
The engine is stopped
•
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows)
ON/RUN
•
Driving position
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, etc.)
START
•
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
The engine only runs with the ignition in the ON/RUN
ignition position, or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3 — ON/RUN
Backup Starting Method
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless sig-
nal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system
from starting the vehicle.
•
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
page 119.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
— HYBRID MODELS ONLY
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in READY state (vehicle run-
ning) with the gear selector in the PARK position for
30 minutes, it will automatically turn off the vehicle. Noti-
fications have been designed into this feature to raise
awareness of the timed event. The instrument cluster
display will display “Ready To Drive” accompanied with
three audible chimes while exiting. The interior warnings
will occur regardless of whether the key fob remains in
the vehicle or is removed. The horn will sound three
times if the fob is removed from the vehicle and the igni-
tion state is in READY mode. To restart the vehicle, follow
the normal process for starting your vehicle.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START,
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
Pushing the START/STOP ignition button may only
activate the Electric Propulsion System and not start
the vehicle’s engine (if running the engine is not
currently required by the Hybrid system). READY will
show in the instrument cluster display whenever the
vehicle is operating in Electric mode and the vehicle
is stationary.
•
If the vehicle’s ignition is in either ACC or ON/RUN,
the vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle
loads.
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
•
The vehicle is stopped
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm
system, etc.) are still available
ACC
•
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows)
•
Mechanical power (vehicle propulsion) is not
available
ON/RUN
•
Driving position
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, etc.)
•
As long as the READY appears in the instrument
cluster display, it does not matter if the engine is
running, vehicle propulsion is available
NOTE:
Vehicle propulsion is only available after the vehicle has
passed through the START position.
Conditions Which May Cause The Engine To Run
•
While maintaining the Hybrid Battery State of
Charge (SOC)
•
When applying maximum vehicle acceleration
•
When maximum passenger compartment heating
has been turned on
•
While maintaining the Exhaust System Catalyst Tem-
perature (after engine start in current ignition cycle -
emissions requirement)
•
When the engine is temporarily operating in Fuel
and Oil Refresh Mode
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3 — ON/RUN
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•
When the hood is open with the ignition in ON/RUN,
post-START mode (eliminates unexpected engine
start-ups)
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for theft. Always
turn the vehicle off, remove the key fobs from the
vehicle, and lock all the doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in the
RUN position with an EVSE connected to the vehicle,
the instrument cluster display will not display the
READY state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply Equip-
ment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle, the vehicle
will go into the READY state. If the vehicle is not shifted
out of PARK 30 minutes after being unplugged, the
vehicle will disable the READY state and transition the
ignition to OFF.
For more information on normal starting, see
page 122.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of approximately 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 318.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down after
10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on, and remain on,
during Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof
(if equipped) operation are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security Light flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with
another push and release of the Remote Start button
on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume
previously set operations (temperature, blower control,
etc.).
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather con-
ditions. The heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat feature will turn on if programmed in the Comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
page 169.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle
will adjust the climate control settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear climate system, it
will remain off to allow for optimal front row
performance.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last settings selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 67.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start
or exits Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
•
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START SYSTEM (BEV) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Remote Start on BEV while plugged in may not always
start the engine.
This system uses the key fob to start the
vehicle conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Start system also activates the Climate
Control system and vented seats (if equipped) in tem-
peratures above 80°F (26.7°C). It activates the
optional heated seats, optional heated steering wheel,
optional heated mirrors and rear defroster in tempera-
tures below 40°F (4.4°C).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the vehicle will start, and
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
vehicle off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the vehicle will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof
(if equipped) operations are disabled when the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key fob Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off while vehicle
is in propulsion system active
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light is not
illuminated
•
Electric Vehicle Service Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or
allow the Remote Start cycle to complete the entire
15 minute cycle.
In addition, the ignition can be cycled to the RUN (Pre-
Propulsion System Active) position by pressing the igni-
tion button with the key fob in the vehicle, and then
pushing the ignition button one more time to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will tem-
porarily disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING
(SCC)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm up
or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a planned
departure time. The target temperature is preset to the
same values used by the Remote Start feature. Unlike
Remote Start, the driver does not need to initiate the
cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote Start button,
instead, a programmed departure time will be used.
Also, all scheduled cabin conditioning will be powered
by the vehicle’s high voltage battery working in conjunc-
tion with any EVSE connected to the vehicle. Unlike
Remote Start, in SCC the vehicle’s gas engine will not
start to provide power or heat for cabin conditioning.
In order to conserve the vehicle’s high voltage battery
power, the driver can choose between allowing the bat-
tery to be drained of power down to <1%, or to stop the
SCC when the high voltage battery has been depleted
to 25% State Of Charge (SOC). The battery percentages
are displayed in the instrument cluster display.
A maximum of three independent schedule event tim-
ers are available for use by the SCC feature and Sched-
uled Charging feature for charging the high voltage bat-
tery. The timers may be used in any combination for
SCC and Scheduled Charging, but only three total tim-
ers are available.
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle so
that the Climate Control system can condition the pas-
senger cabin prior to the scheduled departure time.
Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient tem-
perature, and the next programmed departure time, the
vehicle will determine when to begin cabin conditioning.
Cabin conditioning can begin up to 30 minutes prior to
the scheduled departure time, provided the stated high
voltage battery conditions are met.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time.
Once a scheduled event has been created, it can be
applied to one or more days of the week. The sched-
uled event can also be set to occur only during the cur-
rent week, or repeat every week until the feature is
turned off or the event is changed.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors Closed
•
Hood Closed
•
Liftgate Closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key fob not located inside the vehicle
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Remote Start has not been activated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Hybrid Electric App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
3. Select the schedule to be set (1,2, or 3) by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
touchscreen.
4. Choose “Climate Schedule”.
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage bat-
tery drops to 25% or lower.
6. Set the Departure Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
7. Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days of
the week will be grayed out and the vehicle will per-
form only one SCC event, which will occur at the
next available time that matches the SCC event time
(regardless of what day it was originally set to occur
before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To schedule another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security system
provides both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will pro-
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the parking lights and/or turn signals will
flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
Schedules Screen
Select Climate Schedule
Set Climate Schedule
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
○
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
○
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 31.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
page 31.
•
Hands-Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation
(if equipped).
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
○ For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry, push the START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
•
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens
any door, the alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains
active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator
is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock is in the locked position (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the
OFF position and remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) with-
out having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
the Uconnect system
page 169.
•
The key fob may not be detected by the Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
•
If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate light, parking
lights) for the duration of 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn
signals.
Manual Rear Door Lock
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped).
•
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the out-
side using the hands-free or Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s side
doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. Grabbing the
front passenger door handle will unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
•
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 169.
•
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a key fob inside the car, and it does not detect
any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle
will not unlock the doors when any of the following con-
ditions are met:
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then the doors are
closed.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob
can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the driver or passenger front door handle, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle
unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Set-
tings, the key fob protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)"
remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle for a power open on
vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the elec-
tronic liftgate handle and lift for manual liftgate
vehicles
page 318.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
EXIT — IF EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed
into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been
driven (the gear selector has been placed out of PARK
and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door
locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect
system
page 169.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
NOTE:
If equipped with power sliding doors, using the manual
door handle will activate the power opening/closing
function. Allow the door to open or close fully on its
own, without forcing it.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
•
Always open the door smoothly.
•
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when your
vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide
faster in the downhill direction.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
•
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on
the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the
fuel door is open. If attempted, a message will appear
in the instrument cluster display, and the door will auto-
matically return to the closed position.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed
in several ways:
•
Key fob
•
Inside or outside handles
•
Buttons located:
○ In the overhead console
○ Just inside the sliding door
○ On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open, close, or reverse a
power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the door when the door is locked. All other
ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pushing the but-
ton on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature
(if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle.
There is a power sliding side door switch located on the
B-pillar trim panel on the driver’s and passenger’s side,
just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles
or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the overhead
console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position and an
audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient
resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding
door movements.
•
If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
WARNING!
•
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure
the door path is clear before closing the door.
•
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for
a sliding door or door open message or warning
indicator. Failure to do this could result in uninten-
tionally leaving the sliding door open while driving.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown)
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE SLIDING DOORS —
IF EQUIPPED
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in
and out kicking motion, move your foot from side to
side, or in a sweeping motion, under the vehicle in the
general location below the door handle(s).
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding
door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the slid-
ing door will open almost instantaneously. This
assumes all options are enabled in the Uconnect
Settings.
NOTE:
•
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not
within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any
kicks.
•
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors will only operate when
the gear selector is in PARK.
•
With every movement of the Hands-Free Sliding
Doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn sig-
nals will flash. You can turn these alerts on or off in
the Uconnect system
page 169.
•
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position and an
audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient
resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding
door movements.
•
If the power sliding doors encounter multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the system will
automatically stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off
through Uconnect Settings
page 169.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle)
to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the locked position.
•
After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the unlocked position.
•
The inside door handle will not open the sliding door
when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
•
The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position.
Activation Zone
Child Protection Door Locks
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
•
To avoid unintentional operation of the power slid-
ing door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door
Power Off button, located in the overhead console.
When the overhead console power OFF LED is illumi-
nated, the sliding door may not be power opened or
closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors or pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protec-
tion Door Locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will open the sliding door when the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever down-
ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will
stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steer-
ing wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the instrument
panel below the radio. You can access the button
through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 26.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type of material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position set-
tings for the following features:
•
Driver’s seat
•
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
•
Side mirrors (if equipped)
•
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
•
Memory settings will be linked to the driver profiles
in the Uconnect system, in addition to several other
features (radio presets, home screens, settings,
navigation, phone, etc.)
page 169.
The Driver Memory Settings switch is located on the
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists of
three buttons:
•
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
•
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will
show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY
FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through
the Uconnect Settings
page 169.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
Driver Memory Switch
1 — Memory Profile Button 1
2 — Memory Profile Button 2
3 — Set Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory set-
tings by pushing the set (S) button, and then, within
10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
•
The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to
5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a
recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
•
Memory settings can be linked to driver profiles in
the Uconnect system. Changing driver profiles will
also recall the linked memory settings if the condi-
tions are met
page 169.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button (1 or 2) on the driver's
door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat stops mov-
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory
mirror recall.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
The manual seat adjustment handle is located under
the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment
3—ReclineLever
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline
lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment
— Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or rear-
ward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located
under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
Recline Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat —
If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is fold-
able and removable for added cargo space.
The release strap is located on the front of the seat,
near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release
strap to release the rear latches. The seat assembly
can now be removed from the vehicle by moving it in a
rearward direction from the detent positions in the
floor.
NOTE:
The seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat
stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
tions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat-
back into its original position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Fold-Flat Quad Seats And Stow ‘n Go
Seats
NOTE:
•
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply unfold-
ing the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion may return to its normal shape. Having
an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging the fabric
by hand may smooth away any excess wrinkling.
•
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
Release Strap
In Floor Detent Guides
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position.
Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
•
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when returning
the seat to the original position, the headrest must
be folded back to the original position.
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy
entry into the third row with or without a child seat
installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats) that provides
easier access to the third row by tilting the seat
forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access
the third row.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
Easy Tilt Seat
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
4. To put the seat back into original position, just pull
back on the seatback and lock the seat into
position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death may occur.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat
by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of
the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure
the arm rests are folded up.
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then,
pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the
arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third row
passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat
forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the
seat to the floor for an easy exit.
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat installed.
Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with the Stow
‘n Go feature, are removable for added cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat against
the seat cushion.
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is
in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the seat,
near the floor.
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
Recliner Lever
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
Lift Recline Lever And Fold Seatback Flat
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release
the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge located near
the head restraint and the grab the bar on the rear
side of the seat cushion for easy removal.
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted forward,
align the seat’s front attachments into the detent
positions on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its origi-
nal position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the
locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to
the seating position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Seat Release Strap
Tilt Seat Forward
Seat Removal
In Floor Seat Detents
Installing Seat
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped
NOTE:
•
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply unfold-
ing the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion may return to its normal shape. Having
an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging the fabric
by hand may smooth away any excess wrinkling.
•
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seat-
back by pushing the button on the guide and push-
ing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to
its full upright position.
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
Release Strap “1”
Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
Assist Straps
Strap “2”
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
•
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its low-
ered position could result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the sec-
ond and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
AUTO ADVANCE ‘N RETURN — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n Return
feature, the front seat will move forward automatically
to a location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go
seat movement, without interference by the front seat.
After the second row seat is stowed, the front seat will
move back to the previous location once the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to both
the front driver and passenger power seats
(if equipped).
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not occu-
pied and the seat travel path is clear when operating
the power seat.
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located
on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power slid-
ing door.
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
•
The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door
is not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the
button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If the power sliding door is closing when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
•
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not function
if the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement
page 46.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
a second time. The front seat cushion and seatback
will return to the original starting location.
NOTE:
•
To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push
the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the front
power seat button to stop the seat movement. Push-
ing the Auto Advance ‘n Return button again will
return the front seat to the original starting location.
•
The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes
obstacle detection. When the system detects an
obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direction, and
return to the previous location. A message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that
an obstacle has been detected.
•
If the front seat is already in a location that will
allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat,
the front seat will not move and a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
•
If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
automatically recalibrate when the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button is pushed. This may result in the seat
cushion moving forward and downward, before mov-
ing to the location that will allow space for the sec-
ond row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button (Left Side Shown)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move
the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seatback all the way forward
using the recliner handle located on the outboard side
of the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid
position using the height adjuster handle in the out-
board side of the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return but-
ton located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
page 45.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat (if
equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked
position.
NOTE:
○
Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked
position.
○
Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked
position.
○
For information on storage bin function with the
seats rearward
page 78.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down, and rest it
against the front seats.
4. Remove the plastic storage bin (if equipped) from
the storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by grab-
bing the strap on the lower part of the seatback,
and guide the seat into the storage area.
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into the
storage area.
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
Push Panel Forward
Pull Strap
Push To Lock
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
•
The storage bin cover must be latched and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
•
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright other-
wise damage to the seat may occur.
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using the
manual seat adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return but-
ton located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
page 45.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the unlocked
position.
NOTE:
○
Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked position.
○
Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Extend Floor Panel
Push To Lock
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat
out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward
making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the
seatback into the upright position and pull the head-
rest up.
NOTE:
If the seatback is locked, it will be necessary to use
the recliner handle to unlock the back before folding
into the upright position.
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage
area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original
state, grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks
into position.
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
•
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
•
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its low-
ered position could result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Push Panel Forward
Pull Strap
Extend Panel
Push Down To Lock
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
The switches control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or
Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the seat switch. The seat will move in the direc-
tion of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rear-
ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a four way
lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located
on the outboard side of the equipped power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-
ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped with either
a two way or a four way lumbar adjustment. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support, and if equipped, push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
•
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (6.8 cm) rear-
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (6 cm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position
when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.
•
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(0.7 cm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat
position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (2.3 – 6.8 cm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition is cycled
out of the OFF position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches
(2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled within Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile (if equipped)
page 37.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
within the Uconnect system
page 169.
POWER ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
— IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
•
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be posi-
tioned properly on the occupant and they could be
more seriously injured in an accident as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel
next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/
rearward for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward but-
ton, the seat will move in the direction of the button
push. Release the button when the desired position is
reached.
Power Lumbar Switch Location
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The third row power recline buttons can be locked out
using the Third Row Lockout setting within the
Uconnect system
page 169.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat —
If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
The third row outboard seat belts may interfere with the
power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing
behind the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat.
When the seat is in the desired position, remove the
webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use.
Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is
used to restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
•
The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
•
The center head restraint raises and lowers manu-
ally but will not lower automatically.
•
The head restraint can also be lowered manually
using the pull strap located at the back of the seat
page 55.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated)
position, push and release the “Normal” button. The
seat will automatically stop when the Normal position is
reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push
and release the “Stow” button. The seat will automati-
cally stop when the Stow position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
reverse direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/
Back” button. Release the button when the desired
position is reached.
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power
third row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button, place
the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow
clips, located on the rear trim panel. When the seat
reaches the desired position, remove the webbing
from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain an
occupant.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal
2—Stow
3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push
a different seat position selector switch to stop the
seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired
position can be selected.
4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the but-
ton again.
NOTE:
•
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply unfold-
ing the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion may return to its normal shape. Having
an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging the fabric
by hand may smooth away any excess wrinkling.
•
Permanent wrinkles may still result.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat set-
tings. The indicator lights in each switch indi-
cate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 26.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped
with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the second row passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches are located on
the sliding side door handle trim panels.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push
the switch a second time to select LO-level heating.
Push the switch a third time to shut the heating ele-
ments off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch (Left Side Shown)
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the first row seat cushions are
small fans that draw the air from the passen-
ger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tem-
peratures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located in
the touchscreen.
•
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 26.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER
HOOKS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of the second row
rear seats, and if equipped, the backs of the front row
seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the
bagged goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward. The front head restraints are also
adjustable forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull
the top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, continue pulling forward on the top
of the head restraint to the farthest forward position
and the head restraint will return to the upright
position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment but-
ton at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted
to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well as
the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped), may
have adjustable head restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints
are non-adjustable and non-removable. Do not pull on
non-adjustable head restraints when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment but-
ton at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted
to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised
and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment
page 207.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the adjust-
ment button at the base of each post while pulling the
head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put
the head restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
Release Straps
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
POWER FOLDING THIRD ROW HEAD
RESTRAINTS — IF EQUIPPED
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect system.
Press Vehicle, then Controls located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button to
power fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints can be folded downward using
the Head Restraint button or using the manual
release strap. The head restraints must be raised
manually when occupying the third row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
Uconnect Voice Recognition —
If Equipped
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say:
•
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
Up” word and state your command.
NOTE:
The factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey
Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
•
A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on
the radio status bar to also issue a command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command or saying the vehicle’s “Wake Up”
word and saying a command from the current
category.
Adjustment Button
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 318.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward
the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect
system
page 169.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navi-
gation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
2 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
IF EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL AND APPROACH LIGHTING
— IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob
or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate
the front and rear door handles. It also shines down-
ward to illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
DIMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is con-
trolled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push
the panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the
mirror and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Illuminated Mirror
Conversation Mirror
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
3 — Right Mirror Select
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating
the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror positions can be saved
as part of the driver memory profile (if equipped)
page 37.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push-
ing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to
the normal driving position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal to or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
they will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
•
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding
•
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch)
•
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position
•
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings page 169,
the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after
the doors are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following situa-
tions after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
•
Pushing the lock button on the door panel before
the door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button
again.
•
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on
the door panel, followed by closing the door.
•
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push
the lock button on the key fob.
•
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch
the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually (pushing the mirror
head inward by hand), OR by using the power folding
mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will not
automatically unfold.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING
FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
two detent positions:
•
Full forward position
•
Full rearward position
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 67.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
IF EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside
mirror will move slightly downward from the present
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver's outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled
or disabled through the Uconnect system
page 169.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 318.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can
cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener
page 60. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com for
information or assistance.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transmitter with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the
turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-
pass functions.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights, and the fog lights.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instru-
ment panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch
to the second detent for headlight, parking light and
instrument panel operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking light and instrument panel
light position to the first detent to turn on the head-
lights also. Rotate to the second detent, AUTO position,
to turn on automatic headlights, parking lights, and
instrument panel lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
•
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect system
page 169.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automatically controlling the
high beams through the use of a camera mounted on
the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system to enable the feature
page 169.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further
information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or
above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
1. Deselect “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system
page 169.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from
the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop
functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on or
off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your head-
lights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position. To turn the automatic sys-
tem off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the Automatic mode.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
page 169.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumina-
tion for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. The
90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch
is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are
turned back on or the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or
not remain on. You can change the timer setting
through the Uconnect system
page 169.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle
will chime when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push the headlight
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch con-
trol knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals
on, a chime will sound and a message will display in the
cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position,
and any door is left open or the dimmer control is
rotated all the way up to the dome light on position, the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is placed
in the ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the cour-
tesy lights on/off.
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
•
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the inte-
rior lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery
from discharging once the doors are closed.
•
If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door
or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch, and
are located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
right dimmer control upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left
dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels of the
ambient lighting on the instrument panel and doors.
Courtesy Light Switches
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all
the interior lights will illuminate. At the bottom most
setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off
(dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument light-
ing go to their lowest dimmable setting.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way down to OFF.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end
of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 273.
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
the most sensitive.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
•
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system
page 169.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the outside temperature is below 32°F
(0°C), unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside tem-
perature rises above freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, when the trans-
mission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position
and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h),
unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper
lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
•
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting,
the wiper will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the
wiper will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Automatic Temperature
Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate
to change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice
on the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed
if needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen, or press the button on
the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavail-
able (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if condi-
tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually with-
out disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode
may automatically adjust to optimize customer experi-
ence for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press the
AUTO button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate. AUTO will achieve
and maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed and air distri-
bution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO operation to improve performance. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO
on in one of two ways:
•
Press and release this button on the touchscreen
•
Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
page 76.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
on the touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the wind-
shield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will
cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to
switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is
turned off the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen or push and
release the button on the faceplate to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
NOTE:
The temperature can also be adjusted by pressing the
Temperature readout on the top left and right corners
of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front and rear passenger temperature settings with the
driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will auto-
matically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
•
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Blower speed can be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Press the desired blower speed from 1-7.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen or push and release the button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climate con-
trols from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
•
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. Control functions
now operate the rear system.
•
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect sys-
tem, press the Front Climate or Done button on the
touchscreen.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release the Rear button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator will
illuminate when the rear climate controls are
on.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, within the Rear screen, to
change the current setting. The REAR AUTO
indicator will illuminate when REAR AUTO is
on. This feature automatically controls the rear interior
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the rear sys-
tem to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes
page 76.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the
rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release the Front button to
change the display on the Uconnect system
back to the Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the front occupants with the abil-
ity to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the touch-
screen to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the touch-
screen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s tem-
perature will move up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used
to synchronize the front and rear passenger tempera-
ture settings with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the front or rear passenger temperature/
mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-in Display Rear Control Screen
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these out-
lets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both
the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release the OFF button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system
has floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the head-
liner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the
rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC Sys-
tem will automatically achieve and maintain that com-
fort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
AUTO BUTTON
The AUTO button automatically controls the
interior cabin temperature by adjusting dis-
tribution and amount of airflow. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
page 76.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control up button
to raise the temperature. The rear tempera-
ture settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down but-
ton to lower the temperature. The rear tem-
perature settings are displayed in control
head.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set
to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing
the blower control buttons. This allows the
rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the
two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate Con-
trols to change the air distribution mode for
the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to change
the current setting. The indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
•
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between recirculation mode and out-
side air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C (Air Conditioning) can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection.
Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recircula-
tion mode (if equipped) is not allowed in Defrost mode
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempt-
ing to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the
LED on the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will
cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to
switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is
turned off the climate system will return the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touch-
screen for warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front and rear passenger temperature settings with the
driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will auto-
matically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on the touch-
screen while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes
the driver and passenger temperatures only. In order to
SYNC rear temperature to driver temperature, the
touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
•
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/
Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climate con-
trols from the front MTC display/touchscreen.
To change the rear system settings:
•
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. The control func-
tions now operate the rear system.
•
Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen
to return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access the
rear climate controls. The indicator will illu-
minate when the rear climate controls are
on.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the
rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change the
display on the Uconnect system back to the
Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the rear passengers with inde-
pendent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the touch-
screen to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the touch-
screen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s tem-
perature moves up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used
to synchronize the front and rear passenger tempera-
ture settings with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the front or rear passenger temperature set-
ting while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these out-
lets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the
headliner and floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) system has
floor air outlets at the rear right side of the third row
seats and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seat-
ing position. The system provides heated air through
the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on the headliner on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in the
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control up button
to raise the temperature. The rear tempera-
ture settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down button
to lower the temperature. The rear tempera-
ture settings are displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set
to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing
the blower control buttons. This allows the
rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the
two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate Con-
trols to change the air distribution mode for
the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC) — IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the sys-
tem to maintain by adjusting the driver and passen-
ger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed
to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-
programmable feature within the Uconnect system
page 169.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead
(If vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion pro-
tection and to protect against engine overheating.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 305.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel
Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm
Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and set the mode
control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor
Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging starts to
occur, move the control to
(Mix Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the indentation to open
the compartment.
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Release Handle
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Storage Drawers — If Equipped
There may be a storage drawer located in the lower cen-
ter of the instrument panel, or as part of the center con-
sole. It can be released by pushing the access button
above the drawer. The drawer is actuator assisted once
the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the
fully open position.
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some
models.
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped) located
in the areas below the load floor, located in front of the
second row seats.
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in the
rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked
position so the load floor can fold upwards towards
the seatback.
NOTE:
○
Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
○
Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Instrument Panel Storage Drawer
Front Seatback Storage
In Floor Storage Bin
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the stor-
age bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•
Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
•
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the stor-
age bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY
RELEASE LEVER
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has
an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching
mechanism.
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS —
IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dim-
mer Controls
page 65.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim pan-
els, and the tops of the windows are equipped with
hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Con-
tinue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top
of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle that allow an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
NOTE:
•
If a smartphone is plugged into a video USB port,
the device will only have charging capability and
allow for files/media to be stored, if equipped with
Uconnect Theater.
•
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the system.
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports can be
used at the same time but cannot be used simulta-
neously while playing media. When both Type C and
Type A charge-only USB ports are in use they will be
charged at a reduced rate.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this
vehicle.
•
In the center console
•
On the instrument panel
•
On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media Hubs (if equipped)
•
On the back of the front row seats
•
Above the rear cup holder in the third row of seats
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel
can be switched from ignition only to constant battery
powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for
details.
Sun Screen Extended
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3—AUXPort
Charge Only USB In The Center Console
Rear Seat USB Charging Port Without Uconnect Theater
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery oper-
ated USB devices when connected.
The following list is of different scenarios when a non-
phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger
USB ports, and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost.”
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the
outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key sym-
bol are powered when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled with a bat-
tery symbol are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered out-
lets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Depending on the type of center console your vehicle is
equipped with, there is a front power outlet located
either on the bottom of the instrument panel or inside
the center console.
Rear Seat USB Media Hub With Uconnect Theater
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
The front power outlet can be changed to battery pow-
ered at all times by switching the power outlet fuse in
the Power Distribution Center panel from fuse location
F95A to F95B.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Floor Tray) - If Equipped
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Center Console)
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power Outlet
10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W Power Inverter outlet
located on the right side of the vehicle, before the third
row of seats to convert DC current to AC current. The
Power Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles will exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged
in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN position. It turns off
when the device is unplugged or the ignition is no lon-
ger in ON/RUN position.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the Power Inverter, it
resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power
ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power
Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire-
less charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe-
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
•
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
•
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
•
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object
is detected.
•
Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
•
The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in
order for the phone to charge.
•
To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
•
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
Power Inverter
Wireless Charging Pad Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
•
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
•
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
•
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
•
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
•
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
•
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
•
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
period of time (when the device reaches a certain
temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
age to the phone.
•
The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
•
Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
•
With a compatible device placed on the charging
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a
reminder message may appear on the instrument
cluster display to warn the driver.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac-
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by push-
ing the bar control just below the power window controls.
The window switches will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position, depending upon the accessory delay set-
ting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The
controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position and during power accessory delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power
accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
Window Lockout Switch
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has activated
the Power Window Lockout.
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping
several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down to the second detent, release, and the win-
dow will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up to the second detent, and
release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the control up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the win-
dow is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof/Power Sliding Top
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Sliding Door Power Window Control (Left Side Shown)
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
3 — Vent Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one second.
The sunroof will open automatically from any position
and stop at the full open position. This is called Express
Open.
Push the close switch and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi-
tion. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called Express Close.
NOTE:
•
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
•
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof will
open to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the close switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain
in a partially open condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
POWER SUNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop
at the half-open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be actuated
again to continue to the full-open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade open switch and release it within
one second and the sunshade will open to the half-
open position and stop automatically. Push and release
the sunshade open switch again from the half-open
position and the sunshade will open to the full-open
position and stop automatically. This is called Express
Open.
Push the sunshade close switch and release it within
one second and the sunshade will close automatically
from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed,
the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called Express Close.
NOTE:
•
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the
shade.
•
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade completely.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade open switch and the
shade will open to the half-open position and stop auto-
matically. Push and hold the sunshade open switch
again and the shade will open automatically to the full-
open position.
To close the shade, push and hold the sunshade close
switch.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and
the sunshade will remain in a partially opened condi-
tion until the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of
the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent button within one second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sun-
roof position.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent
switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle
to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof open-
ing to the Vent position.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system
page 169.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING
WARNING!
For Hybrid models: Always place the ignition in the
OFF position before opening the hood. If the ignition
is in the RUN position and the Propulsion System is
active when the hood is opened, the electric motor
could automatically start, and persons not clear of
the vehicle could be injured by the electric motor’s
moving parts.
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be
released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driv-
er’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the pas-
senger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is
located behind the center front edge of the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of
the hood.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
•
For Hybrid models: If the vehicle was actively charg-
ing the high voltage battery when the hood was
opened, the vehicle will stop charging until the hood
is closed.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
•
For Hybrid models: Electric drive mode will not be
available while the hood is open. A message will
show in the instrument cluster display to alert the
driver.
CLOSING
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and rein-
sert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make
sure that the hood is completely closed.
NOTE:
For PHEV models: If the vehicle stopped charging the
high voltage battery when the hood was opened, the
vehicle will resume charging when the hood closes.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
•
Key fob
•
Liftgate Release Handle
•
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The out-
side handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the elec-
tronic liftgate release handle will unlock and release
the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate.
NOTE:
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and
the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected set-
ting in the Uconnect system
page 169.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
•
Overhead console liftgate button
•
Key fob
•
Outside handle (open or reset liftgate latch)
•
Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (when liftgate is
open)
•
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens liftgate
only
Using the previously listed ways to open or close the
liftgate:
•
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
•
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
•
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead con-
sole to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will oper-
ate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the
touch pad on the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate
foot activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the
liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
•
To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot
activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
•
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors
and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system.
•
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed
with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned
on or off in Uconnect Settings
page 169.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
NOTE:
If the power liftgate will not fully open or latch close,
check the latch for damage or obstacles that may be
preventing the closing operation. If the problem per-
sists, proceed as follows:
1. Press the electronic liftgate release handle on the
outside of the liftgate to home/reset the latch
mechanism.
2. Manually close the liftgate by pulling downward
using the closing handle.
3. Resume normal power liftgate open or closing
operation.
If the home/reset procedure is unsuccessful, see an
authorized dealer for service.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE —
IF EQUIPPED
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the liftgate
door handle. You may also move your foot sideways or
in a sweeping motion.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Button
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package,
the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power Liftgate
will be located on the left and right side of the receiver.
Use a straight kicking motion under either activation
zone to open the Hands-Free Liftgate.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximately one second. This assumes
all options are enabled in the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m),
the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off in Uconnect Settings. The Hands-Free Liftgate fea-
ture should be turned off during jacking, tire chang-
ing, and vehicle service
page 169.
NOTE:
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
•
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
operated manually.
•
The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
•
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate only works to open the
liftgate.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tem-
perature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8ft(1.2x
2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated
vacuum system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only
and should only be used on dry materials and on
in-vehicle surfaces. It is located in the rear trim panel
behind the sliding door on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using your
vacuum, basic precautions should be followed, includ-
ing the following:
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in either
the ACC position, or engine running (ON), unless
you are using the vacuum system. Be aware a child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle when the vacuum system is in
use. ALWAYS push ignition button to place ignition
in the OFF position when finished using the
vacuum system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:
•
Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or
while driving.
•
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any
liquids.
•
Do not use to vacuum up anything out-
side of the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as
gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form an explosive mix-
ture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or
flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition
and explode.
•
Do not vacuum anything that is burning
or smoking, such as cigarettes, matches,
or hot ashes/embers.
•
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
•
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
•
Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
•
Do not put any object into openings. Do not use
with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint,
hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.
•
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
•
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as
glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
•
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
•
Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
Rear Cargo Area
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your
vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or ser-
vice stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away
from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump.
The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches
(45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle.
The vacuum will operate in two modes:
•
Ignition in the ACC position: Engine remains off,
and vacuum usage is limited to 10 minutes.
•
Ignition in the START position: Engine is running,
and vacuum usage is unlimited until the vehicle’s
battery level falls below 60%.
NOTE:
The vacuum will not operate when the ignition is in the
OFF position, or in the ON/RUN position with the engine
off. For more information on ignition positions, see
page 23.
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to 10 min-
utes of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, and push ignition button to place
ignition in Accessory (ACC) mode. The engine will not
be running in this mode. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children.
NOTE:
The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off bat-
tery power and then the vacuum will shut down. A
low battery indication light (LOW PWR) located below
the vacuum nozzle storage location will come on
one minute before the vacuum shuts down.
Engine Running (START) Operation - For more than
10 minutes of operation
○
Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows.
○
Always apply the parking brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and leave engine running.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can cause
serious injury or death. Follow these precautions to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases.
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Always position vehicle outdoors
and fully open all side windows before using
vacuum system with the engine running.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly.
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend vacuum
hose from the storage location.
NOTE:
The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle floor.
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
NOTE:
To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open
the front Attachment Compartment.
○
Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spaces
including the seat latches located in the floor.
○
Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris
from carpets and seats. This tool can also be
used to pick up pet hair.
○
Hose Extension — Use to add another 12 ft
(3.6 m) of usable length to the vacuum hose.
Hose extension is provided in a bag attached to a
grocery hook behind the third row seat on the
driver’s side.
Front Storage Compartments
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push the vacuum on/off button located under
the vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum as
needed.
NOTE:
○
When the vacuum is ON, the LED indicator on
the on/off button will illuminate.
○
When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indicator will
also be off.
○
After nine minutes of operation in ACC mode
(engine not running), the Low Power Indicator
Light (LOW PWR) will illuminate.
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of fire,
serious injury or death:
•
Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or
while driving.
•
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any
liquids.
•
Do not use to vacuum up anything out-
side of the vehicle.
•
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as
gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form an explosive mix-
ture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or
flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition
and explode.
•
Do not vacuum anything that is burning
or smoking, such as cigarettes, matches,
or hot ashes/embers.
•
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
•
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
•
Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
•
Do not put any object into openings. Do not use
with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint,
hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.
•
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
•
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as
glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
•
Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your
vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or ser-
vice stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away
from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump.
The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches
(45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle.
5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum
off and store vacuum hose and any attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
○
If the ignition is in the ACC position, push the
START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in
the OFF position, remove key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
○
If the engine is running, raise all of the windows,
push the START/STOP ignition button to place
ignition in the OFF position, remove key fob from
the vehicle, close all of the doors and the lift-
gate and lock the vehicle.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
Vacuum Troubleshooting
•
DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an object
becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend
the hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor is
running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn the
vacuum OFF and remove the hose from the vehicle
using the subsequent removal instructions. If the
filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin pro-
cedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection bin
to remove any collected debris from the filter. Both
the bin and the filter can be rinsed with water if
needed. To avoid mold and stale odors, allow both
to dry completely before reinstalling in your vehicle.
If the filter has tears, holes or other damage and
needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized
dealer.
•
If there are any other issues with your vacuum, con-
tact an authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no user
serviceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the access panel
behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the access panel by pulling the finger grip
towards you and then pull downward.
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull
the bin towards you.
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash
can. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to
remove loose debris from the filter. If the filter is
clogged from extended use, have the filter replaced
by an authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE:
The debris bin must be fully installed and locked for the
vacuum to function properly.
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the access
panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
1. Open the access panel.
Vacuum System Access Panel
Debris Bin Release Knob
Vacuum System Access Panel
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Open the small access panel on the upper right
side, and unclip the hose from the hose access port
by pushing the yellow vacuum hose release lever
with right thumb and lifting the hose with index
finger.
3. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located
behind the sliding door.
4. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose
out through vacuum nozzle storage location.
5. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the
hose. Take care not to perforate the hose while
attempting to dislodge any objects.
6. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the hose
into place.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
The Stow ‘n Place roof rack does not increase the total
load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total
load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the exter-
nal rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift
the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail.
Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side.
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Vacuum Hose Release Lever
Roof Rack
1—SideRail
2 — Crossbar
Thumb Screw
Removing Crossbars
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the
thumb screw down.
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure
the letters on the crossbars align with the matching
letters on the side rail.
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb
screws completely.
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete
the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed deploy-
ment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in two
different positions.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away
from the matching letter to remove it from the
deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Bending Pivot
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Cr ossbars
Crossbar Pivot
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side
rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with
the matching letters on the side rail.
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten
the thumb screws completely.
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar
on the opposite side.
NOTE:
•
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
•
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury, or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
•
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and appropriately secure the
load and any protective layer placed between the
load and the roof surface.
(Continued)
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
Stowed Crossbars
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
CAUTION!
•
Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
•
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
99
3
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
○
When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-
play shows the instrument cluster display mes-
sages
page 103.
○
The display shows one of the main menu items
after the ignition is turned/placed on.
3. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The gauge can indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats
page 276.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the gauge
drops back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
5. Fuel Gauge
○
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID MODELS
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. % Power Gauge
○
Indicates vehicle power. The upper half of the
gauge is a summation of the engine and high
voltage battery power applied to move the
vehicle. Bottom half indicates when the high
voltage battery is charging via regenerative
braking, while slowing the vehicle down.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display. When the appropriate condi-
tions exist, this display shows messages
page 103.
○
Max Regeneration symbol appears in
the upper right corner of the Instru-
ment Cluster Display when you are
driving at the maximum efficiency
page 117.
3. Fuel Gauge
○
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
4. Left Reconfigurable Screen With Four Customer Pro-
grammable Options
○
Efficiency Coach: This gauge provides visual
awareness on how to achieve maximum energy
efficiency while driving. When accelerating and
braking, the most efficient operation will be rep-
resented with the gauge color being green. Less
efficient operation will be represented by yellow,
followed by orange, as the level of efficiency
decreases.
○
Charge/Power: This gauge represents the
source of the power utilized to accelerate the
vehicle. The teal outer ring represents the High
Voltage (HV) battery output during acceleration,
and input power during regeneration. The blue
inner ring represents the engine output power.
○
Energy Economy: this gauge represents the
combined MPG (or km/L, or L/100km) obtained
through engine use and MPG (or km/L, or
L/100km) equivalent obtained through HV bat-
tery use. The outer ring represents current
energy economy. The white inner ring repre-
sents average energy economy.
○
NONE
5. Right Reconfigurable Screen With Four Customer
Programmable Options
○
EV Range & Battery %: shows values for electric
range and battery %, along with a teal gauge
showing battery % (state of charge <1 to 100%).
○
Electric Range: shows the vehicle’s electric
range capability, based on the High Voltage Bat-
tery State of Charge (state of charge <1 to
100%).
○
All Range Values: shows values for electric,
hybrid and total range, along with a white gauge
showing the total range.
○
NONE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF position (and the key removed,
for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show
you how systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted con-
trols allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•
Back/Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
•
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
•
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
•
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
•
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu
item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for one
second to reset displayed/selected features that
can be reset.
STOP SAFELY VEHICLE WILL SHUT
OFF SOON
This warning will be displayed on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operational
issue will occur shortly, which will cause the vehicle's
propulsion system to turn off.
If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle in a
safe location as soon as possible. Have the vehicle
transported to an authorized dealer.
•
This is a high priority message
•
This message will be displayed continuously
•
Cannot be cleared with button press
•
A single chime will sound
STOP SAFELY AND LEAVE THE
VEHICLE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
A warning will appear on the instrument panel display if
the system detects the high voltage battery has over-
heated. This can result in a vehicle fire, and the release
of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce the risk of a
larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage propulsion system
will turn off within thirty seconds of displaying this
warning. At that time, the vehicle may not accelerate.
You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon Warning Message
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As Possible
Warning Message
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
This message will be displayed continuously
•
Cannot be cleared with button press
•
A continuous and rapid chime will sound.Stop and
park the vehicle in an open area. Have all passen-
gers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and move to
a safe distance away from the vehicle. After all pas-
sengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately. Even if you do not see
flames, a fire may start at any moment, so do not
attempt to re-enter or start the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display for approximately five
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indi-
cate it is time to change the engine oil. The engine
oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
•
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
•
To reset the oil change indicator after performing
the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after sched-
uled maintenance is completed. Resetting oil life other
than when associated with a scheduled maintenance
may result in damage due to not properly maintaining
the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down
arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the left
arrow button or right arrow but-
ton to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
6. Push the up
arrow button to exit the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the
driver interactive display menu options until the desired
menu is reached
page 103.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in
the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument clus-
ter display. Push and release the OK button to toggle
between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the following information submenus:
Tire Pressure Monitor
If tire pressure is correct for all tires, a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pres-
sure values in each corner of the ICON with the pres-
sure value of the low tire displayed in a different color
than the other tire pressure value.
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset
page 205.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met
in order to reset Oil Life:
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to
100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message will
display for five seconds, describing the required condi-
tions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Driver Assist is highlighted in the instrument clus-
ter display.
Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense:
•
Driver Assist Screen shows the current status of
both the ACC and the LaneSense systems
•
Pop-up messages also indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until
one of the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control Off: when ACC is deacti-
vated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready: when ACC is acti-
vated but the vehicle speed setting has not been
selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol Ready.” Push the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel).
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activ-
ity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•
Distance Setting Change
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in
the Owner’s Manual.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster displays the current LaneSense
system settings. The information displayed depends on
LaneSense system status and the conditions that need
to be met.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual.
Hybrid Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Hybrid Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the following information submenus:
Energy Economy
•
Average MPG gauge + value (hold OK to reset)
•
Current Energy Economy gauge + value
•
Total Range
Range to Empty
•
Electric Range
•
Hybrid Range
•
Total Range
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Efficiency Coach
Efficiency Coach will monitor your current driving to
help you drive as efficient as possible.
•
“Accel” is based on amount of acceleration (Differ-
ent from MPG).
○ The gauge will only move up when accelerator
pedal is pushed (or accelerating with Cruise Con-
trol or ACC).
○ Above a certain rate of change will be considered
inefficient.
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
“Brake” is based on amount of deceleration
(slowing down).
○ The gauge will only move down when brake pedal
is pushed (or decelerating with Cruise Control or
ACC).
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
The gauge bar color will transition smoothly up and
down, and have a gradual change based on
efficiency.
○ Center of gauge is 0% Accel and 0% Brake.
○ +/-0-35% of gauge fills green, +/-36-80% yellow,
and +/-81-100% orange (with a blend between
each color).
•
When Rotary Shifter is shifted to L:
○ Max Regen Telltale is displayed in the
upper right hand corner of the instru-
ment cluster
○ Max Regeneration ON’ Message is
displayed for 5 seconds
NOTE:
While attempting to shift into L, if “vehicle speed is
too high to shift to L” message is displayed, the Max
Regen ON/OFF message/TT should not be Dis-
played
page 103
•
When Rotary Shifter is shifted back to P/R/N/D:
○ Max Regen Telltale goes away
○ Max Regeneration OFF Message is displayed for
5 seconds
NOTE:
While attempting to shift out of L, if “vehicle speed
is too High to shift to P (or R)” message is displayed,
the Max Regen OFF/ON message should not be dis-
played. The Telltale should continue to display as
long as the vehicle is in L gear.
Charge/Power
•
Charging is represented by the gauge filling on the
left hand side.
•
Power is represented by the gauge filling on the
right hand side.
Efficiency Coach Gauge
Max Regen Cluster Message
Charge/Power Gauge
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
3
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will
display the following:
•
Two submenu pages that can be toggled between
using the left
and right arrow buttons; one
with Current Value displayed and one without the
Current Value displayed:
○ Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ Range To Empty (miles or km)
○ Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
•
Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
TRIP INFO GASOLINE
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the left
or right arrow but-
ton to scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus.
The Trip information will display the following:
•
Distance
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
TRIP INFO PHEV
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Trip Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Trip A
•
Distance Electric
•
Distance Hybrid
•
Distance Total
•
Average Energy Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Trip B
•
Distance Electric
•
Distance Hybrid
•
Distance Total
•
Average Energy Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the system
and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages
remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter
the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter
the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass
(If Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Time Range
Current (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Center
None Compass
(If Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Range Time
Current (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title Digital Speed
Defaults
•
Restore
•
Cancel
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Lower Left or Lower Right
None Compass
(If Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Upper Center
None Compass
(If Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km,
or km/L)
Audio/Phone Digital Speed Menu Title
Odometer
•
Show
•
Hide
Defaults
•
Restore
•
Cancel
PHEV INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Left Side
None Energy Economy Efficiency
Coach
Charge/ Power
Right Side
None Battery % &
Range
Electric Range
Charge/ Power All (3) Range
Values
Upper Left and Upper Right
None Compass
(If Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Average MPG
(or “L/100km”,
or “km/L”)
Current MPG
(or “L/100km”,
or “km/L”)
TripA(Total
Distance)
TripB(Total
Distance)
Battery %
Total Range Electric Range Hybrid Range
Odometer
•
Show
•
Hide (unless door open)
Defaults
•
Restore
•
Cancel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are deteriorat-
ing, electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This
is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential 12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be
functional when the vehicle propulsion system is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the High
Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or tempera-
ture. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 111.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of charging
system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern
did not help to identify the cause.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed. This indica-
tor will reflect which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
3
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
system
page 134.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 259.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light
will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
page 207.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
tinue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when ser-
vice to the hybrid electric system is needed.
It will be accompanied by a “Service Hybrid
Electric Vehicle System” warning message in
the cluster. If the telltale stays on or continues to come
on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when a plug
status fault is detected (when vehicle not in
motion). It will be accompanied by a cluster
message indicating the type of fault. You
may receive one of the following messages if a fault is
detected:
•
“Service Charging System” – If you see this mes-
sage, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an issue
continues, contact an authorized dealer to service
your high voltage charging system.
•
“Issue Detected Check External Charging Station” –
If you see this message, the charging station maybe
powered off, having internal fault or being sched-
uled to charge later. It is recommended to try a dif-
ferent charging station. If an issue continues, then
contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may not
support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle does
not charge, it may be connected to a non-compliant
Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators. Please iden-
tify this failure to the site operator and/or EVSE
provider.
•
Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
Torque Limited Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when vehicle
acceleration is limited due to a reduction in
engine or electric motor performance. Con-
tact an authorized dealer for service if illumi-
nation persists.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
page 138.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the prob-
lem diagnosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnos-
tic System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a
lane marker. The warning light will flash
when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker
page 152.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on,
and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low
Fuel Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate and a single
chime will sound when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Service AWD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the FCW or PEB Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
page 202.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service
page 135.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
3
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
function telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Detected Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the
vehicle in front is detected
page 138.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and
there is no vehicle in front detected
page 138.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 137.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is armed and
ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs
page 152.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
page 135.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and capable.
When the switch is pressed, the following instrument
cluster messages will be seen:
•
“Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
•
“Max Regeneration Off” – appears when the feature
is turned off.
•
“Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when
the feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
page 106.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the
vehicle.
Plug Status Indicator Light
When plugged in, the green plug indicator
light will illuminate if the EVSE charging plug
is securely attached to the charging port.
This indicates that the plug is detected, but
doesn't mean it is charging. It will be accompanied with
a cluster message indicating the charge status:
•
“Plugged In And Charging”
•
“Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set Schedule”
•
“Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned
on but not set
page 138.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
page 137.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left,
right, or neither lane line has been detected.
If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs on the detected lane line
page 152.
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
The Set Speed Display indicator light indi-
cates the set speed for the Cruise Control
and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and auto-
matic transmission control systems. When these sys-
tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
3
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the perfor-
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized service
technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle
and emissions system
page 169.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
(N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting
to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using the ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions without start-
ing the vehicle and to use the accessories, follow these
steps:
•
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
•
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
•
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (instru-
ment cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
•
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 103.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK under certain situations. It is a
back-up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
119
4
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to
turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the
vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehi-
cle’s transmission to the PARK position. The gear
selector will automatically reset itself to the PARK
position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the
OFF position (engine off). When AutoPark is activated
the instrument cluster will display the message
“AutoPark Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions
are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shift-
ing the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position.
The Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also
activate in some conditions
page 127.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and
the PARK position is properly indicated, before exit-
ing the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the
brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
The gear position indicator will blink continuously until
the gear selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will
default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the conditions are
met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Place the ignition to the START position and release
it when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
WARNING!
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 254.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP
THE ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING
THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
off. The ignition switch position will remain in the
ACC position until the gear selector is in PARK and
the button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
and the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to
the OFF position.
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
To achieve Propulsion System Active (PSA) or Ready to
Drive mode, press the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
page 14.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back-up method
can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
NORMAL STARTING
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Achieving Vehicle READY Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The READY indicator will appear in the cluster when
the vehicle is in Ready to Drive mode, which may
include the start of the engine depending on condi-
tions such as battery state of charge and engine
temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch by providing three positions: OFF, ACC
and RUN. To change the ignition mode without starting
the vehicle (to power certain accessories), follow these
steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once, without
brake pedal being pressed, to place the ignition in the
ACC position (instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time, without brake pedal being pressed, to place
the ignition in the RUN position (instrument cluster
will display “Ignition or Accessory On”).
NOTE:
○
The vehicle is not able to be driven in the Ignition
or Accessory On position, see “Achieving Vehicle
READY Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button”
previously defined in this section for further
information.
○
The rotary gear selector will turn but only PARK
and NEUTRAL are accessible in the Ignition or
Accessory On position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time,
without brake pedal being pressed, to return the
ignition to the OFF position (instrument cluster will
display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and near the gear selector. If the "P" indica-
tor is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to
turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the
vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehi-
cle’s transmission to the PARK position. The rotary
shifter will automatically reset itself to the PARK posi-
tion. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF
position (Engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark
Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions
are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shift-
ing the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position.
The Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also
activate in some conditions.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a com-
plete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that
the transmission gear position indicator solidly indi-
cates PARK without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle
is completely stopped, and the PARK position is
properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK or into or out of REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal with the excep-
tion of shifting between DRIVE and LOW. Shifting
between DRIVE and LOW can occur without any
brake application.
Achieving Propulsion System Active (PSA) Using
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the
brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may park.
Park will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will
default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the previously stated
condition is met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AFTER STARTING
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will automati-
cally control engine operation.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed, the instrument clus-
ter display will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” mes-
sage, and the vehicle will remain running.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed continuously
for at least two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) the vehicle ignition mode will exit Drive Ready
mode and enter Accessory mode. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
•
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour,
the vehicle will automatically turn itself off.
•
The vehicle provides automatic notification, using a
three Horn Chirp Alert, cluster chiming, and a cluster
message “Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle” if the
vehicle was not turned OFF (still “Ready to Drive”)
and a valid key fob for the vehicle is not detected
within the passenger cabin, following the opening
and closing of any passenger compartment door
(requires all doors to be closed before the key fob
check will occur). These automatic alerts are to
remind the driver to turn off the vehicle before leav-
ing it, as well as, to let the driver know that the vehi-
cle's key fob may have been unintentionally
removed from the vehicle by an exiting passenger.
After providing the Horn Chirp Alert, additional auto
chirps will be inhibited until the gear selector has
been moved out of park or ignition cycled.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient tem-
peratures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater
is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow these
steps to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the
passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it
into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it away
behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
•
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from an authorized dealer.
•
The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
•
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on
the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt elec-
trical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 269.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
•
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
•
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features
page 169.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
To apply the parking brake manually, push the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the
parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning Light
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch
will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while
you apply the parking brake, you may notice a small
amount of brake pedal movement. The parking brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. Once the parking brake is
engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while the
parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmis-
sion is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is
buckled and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle
away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the
brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument clus-
ter and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
Electric Park Brake Switch
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
•
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to
slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the
brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, push on the EPB switch for as long as engage-
ment is desired. The Brake Warning Light will illumi-
nate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the
parking brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys-
tem, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flash-
ing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB system is
required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed to be
applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in
PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by cus-
tomer selection through the customer programmable
features
page 169.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) system that will engage the parking brake auto-
matically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the auto-
matic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is
unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at a
standstill, and there is no attempt to press the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal, the parking brake will auto-
matically engage to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB while the driver door is open and brake pedal is
pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position
and back to ON again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering Brake Service in your vehicle
page 169. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
•
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•
The parking brake must be unapplied.
•
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Brake Service, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake sys-
tem to normal operation:
•
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•
Apply the EPB.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the igni-
tion is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the igni-
tion is in the ACC position (even though the engine will
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes
are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the
engine must be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE,
and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on
vehicle speed. The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the instru-
ment cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate the
gear selector. Push down on the gear selector and then
rotate it, to access the L position. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEU-
TRAL, when stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift
past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec-
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Soft-
ware and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear
only in very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
Transmission Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake.
•
Shift the transmission into PARK.
•
Turn the ignition off.
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 167.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 261.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate, a
warning message will appear in the instrument cluster,
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or
NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm
page 131. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suit-
able level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending
very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will
downshift for increased engine braking. To access the
LOW position, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain
in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or dur-
ing some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shift-
ing properly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal.
The torque converter clutch will function normally once
the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — HYBRID
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission will NOT shift out of the PARK position
if the engine is not running even when the brakes are
applied. Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF
(not in ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
HYBRID TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The trans-
mission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW (L) posi-
tion will increase the rate of deceleration along with
increasing regeneration of power into the vehicle’s High
Voltage (HV) battery (in comparison to the DRIVE posi-
tion). The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed
both above the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster display. To select a gear range, simply rotate the
gear selector. Push down on the gear selector, and then
rotate it, to access the L position. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped). To shift past
multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE),
simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the transmission will
shift into NEUTRAL and the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The vehicle propulsion system can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while
the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake.
•
Shift the transmission into PARK.
•
Turn the ignition OFF.
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Transmission Gear Selector
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
This vehicle incorporates an Electric Park Brake activa-
tion feature which engages automatically when the
vehicle is parked on a 9% sloped surface, with the
vehicle pointing up the grade or down the grade.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
position, and also press the brake pedal. Other-
wise, damage to the gear selector could result.
•
DO NOT press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will broad-
cast a sound from the rear of the vehicle to warn
nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching. In
addition, the module will indicate a change in speed by
varying the volume of sound.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the propulsion system active. The
vehicle may be started in this range. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
exit the vehicle.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will broad-
cast a sound from the rear of the vehicle (if moving in
the rearward direction) or from the front (if moving in
the forward direction) or from both the front and rear if
vehicle direction cannot be determined, to warn nearby
pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching. In addition,
the module will indicate a change in speed by varying
the volume of sound.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 167.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 261.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
NOTE:
•
If the transmission becomes too hot, the Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light may illuminate, a
warning message may appear in the instrument
cluster display and the torque level may be reduced
until the transmission cools down.
•
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM)
will broadcast a sound from the front of the vehicle
to warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is
approaching. In addition, the module will indicate a
change in speed by varying the volume of sound.
LOW (L)
This range should be used when descending very steep
grades or when increased regeneration is desired. The
vehicle transmission can be operated continuously in
LOW without damaging the vehicle or causing issues.
Using the LOW position will increase the rate of decel-
eration (along with increasing regeneration of power
into the vehicle’s high voltage battery) when the accel-
erator pedal is released in comparison to the DRIVE
position. To access the LOW position, push down on the
gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise. Shifting
between DRIVE and LOW can be done at any speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
NOTE:
•
Driving the vehicle in LOW will make the transitions
between vehicle accelerating and coasting, as well
as vehicle coasting and accelerating, more
noticeable.
•
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM)
will broadcast a sound from the front of the vehicle
to warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is
approaching. In addition, the module will indicate a
change in speed by varying the volume of sound.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, vehicle
speed is limited to about 45 mph (72 km/h). In addition
to the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL), the Service
Hybrid System Telltale, the Red Turtle indication, and a
pop-up message indicating that vehicle speed may be
limited may all be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for ser-
vice without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain functionality by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
2. Place the transmission in PARK, if possible. If not,
place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the vehicle
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the vehicle.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to
the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent
to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause premature wear of the driveline
components.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancella-
tion system. This system is designed to address
exhaust and engine noise. The system relies on four
microphones embedded in the headliner, which monitor
exhaust and engine noise, and assists an onboard fre-
quency generator, which creates counteracting sound
waves in the audio system’s speakers. This helps keep
the vehicle quiet at idle and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil-
ity. The power steering system adapts to different driv-
ing conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power Steering
System Over Temp” message is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for
a few moments until the icon and message turn off
page 111.
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Service Power Steering" or "Power
Steering Assist Off - Service System” mes-
sage and a steering wheel icon are displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates
that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance
page 111.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal, pressing the accelerator
pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically
re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver key
start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section
page 111.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained throughout the Auto Stop/Start
process.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and
ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in
the instrument cluster display Stop/Start screen. Situa-
tions when the engine will not stop include (but not lim-
ited to):
•
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start
OFF button.
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low. During this time a message
will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery
Charging”.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is open.
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Engine temperature is too high.
•
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
•
Vehicle is at too high of an altitude.
•
Ambient temperature is beyond operating range.
•
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
•
Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery
Charging”.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
•
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and the Autostop mode will be dis-
abled
page 111.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/
Start OFF switch again (located on the switch bank).
The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service STOP/
START System” message and a yellow Stop/Start tell-
tale will appear in the instrument cluster display
If the “Service STOP/START System” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
•
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected.
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
Stop/Start OFF Button
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The Cruise Control Set Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. The Cruise Con-
trol Set Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently
page 137.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected
page 318.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately three minutes in the stop posi-
tion. If the target vehicle does not start moving
within three minutes the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be canceled.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system
settings. The information it displays depends on ACC
system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
play will show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “Driver
Override” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while an ACC is enabled, the system will not be con-
trolling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is at a standstill longer than two sec-
onds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
existing set speed.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to push
the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC
Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the sys-
tem adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages page 139.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following the vehicle in front, your
vehicle will resume motion, without the need for any
driver action, if the vehicle in front starts moving within
two seconds.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
for approximately three consecutive minutes, the park-
ing brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be canceled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will show “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly
into the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will show “ACC/
AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
plays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released when per-
forming a parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
•
The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event, turning
ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch, or chang-
ing the gear while the automatic brakes are being
applied.
•
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
•
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
•
The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
•
The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
•
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect system.
•
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE.
NOTE:
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
page 148.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system's operating speed, a warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the
vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and ori-
entation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the dis-
play will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 sec-
ond tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert operation when
the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is station-
ary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
page 169.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume set-
tings will not be accessible from the instrument cluster
display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected in the Uconnect system
page 169.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 103. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “ParkSense Off” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster dis-
play will show the “ParkSense Off” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense sys-
tem will reject customer input to turn the system off via
the switch. The instrument cluster display will show
"KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Dis-
abled" message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors",
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors", or the
"ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the instrument cluster display will show a
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors", "ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" or "ParkSense Unavail-
able Service Required" pop-up message for five seconds.
After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed
with a "WIPE OFF" or “SERVICE” overlay, depending on
the location and fault type. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly.
These arc alerts will interrupt the "ParkSense Unavailable
Wipe Rear Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front
Sensors", or "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors",
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" appears in
the instrument cluster display make sure the outer sur-
face and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" mes-
sage appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter will display “ParkSense Off.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “ParkSense Off” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the appropri-
ate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
appropriate fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors” message to be dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
•
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
•
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if
the object is moving. This may cause the automatic
braking application to be delayed.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be dis-
connected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
•
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
•
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc.,
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
•
New vehicles from the dealership must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the
performance of the feature.
•
The use of wheels and tires that are different size to
the original equipment could affect the operation of
the system.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system, push the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•
Parking maneuver is completed.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur-
ing active steering guidance into the parking space.
•
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
•
ParkSense switch is pushed.
•
The driver’s door is opened.
•
The liftgate is opened.
•
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking Sys-
tem intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum numbers of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
•
The gear selector is in DRIVE.
•
The ignition is in the RUN position.
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
activated.
•
The driver’s door is closed.
•
The liftgate is closed.
•
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
•
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the previously listed conditions are
not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct
the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will can-
cel. The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR
PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled the default mode is parallel park. A message,
“Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpendicu-
lar Park” will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to parallel
or perpendicular. Once the driver pushes OK for a per-
pendicular parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpendicular
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle
you want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger's
side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
•
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
•
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc., from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
•
The feature will only indicate the last detected park-
ing space (example: if passing multiple available
parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last
detected parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
surroundings and move backward.
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering
wheel, before instructing the driver to check surround-
ings and complete the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu-
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed
momentarily.
Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Parallel Park
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
NOTE:
•
It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain a clear
line of sight with the instrument cluster display for
driving instructions during a parking maneuver.
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
•
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly. All instructions will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
•
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steer-
ing guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if the sys-
tem is canceled.
•
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
ward. You are responsible for safety and must con-
tinue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
uses a forward facing camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the Lane-
Sense system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro-
vides a visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or
a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel
if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “Lane-
Sense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
Telltale
is solid white only when the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
display will show the left inside lane line flashing
yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the
left of the display will remain solid yellow. The Lane-
Sense telltale
changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
•
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-
tion of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off)
while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to
flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the inten-
sity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensi-
tivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
page 169.
NOTE:
•
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
•
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
•
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this
note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Cam-
era is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
page 169.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen X button to disable the camera image is
made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE
gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of
REVERSE can be disabled through the camera settings
menu with the Uconnect system.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen but-
tons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors
are open. The image will be displayed on the touch-
screen display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four sequential cam-
eras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
page 169.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
the Rear View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
There is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the Surround View system is exited
and the last known screen appears again.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen X button, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
•
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View system is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls screen within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View and Front View in a split screen display.
There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the
front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color
from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to
the oncoming object.
NOTE:
•
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
•
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
•
Top View will show which sliding doors are open.
•
Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the Rear
View. The Top View will be disabled when this
is selected.
Front View Plus Top View
Pressing the Front View button will show you
what is immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the Front
View. The Top View will be disabled when this
is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
Zoom View
When the Rear View is being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the dis-
play screen, the image will zoom in to four times the
standard view. Pressing the icon a second time will
return the view to the standard Rear View.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay will
display the standard Rear View. If the vehicle is then
returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
•
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
•
The vehicle shifted into PARK.
•
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
•
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings
page 169.
Surround View Camera View
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
•
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
ommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a FamCam system
that consists of an interior monitoring camera mounted
on the headliner that allows you to view cargo/
passengers in the rear interior of the vehicle through
the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam button
under “Controls” in the Vehicle Menu of the Uconnect
system
page 169. Alternatively, the feature can be
accessed through the App Drawer or a shortcut for the
feature can be added to the Favorites bar at the top of
the screen for quick access.
The display will show the entire vehicle cabin view on
the left side of the display, and a zoomed-in view of a
selected seat on the right side of the display.
To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view, press
a different seat location on the left side of the display.
The zoomed-in view will then show the new seat loca-
tion. By default, the second row driver’s side seat will
be displayed in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low-light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the touch-
screen X button, the view will close. Otherwise, the
FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the
same seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
FamCam Display (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5.
Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after the
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear
edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice
buildup.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
MODELS (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK position.
2. Push the fuel filler door release button (located in
the driver's door in the upper map pocket).
3. The button push will initiate a sequence of events to
depressurize the fuel system. A message will display
in the cluster when the vehicle is ready to be fueled.
NOTE:
○
After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle; beyond 20 min-
utes you will need to push the release button
again.
○
Under normal circumstances, the fuel door could
take up to 15 seconds to open. It may take lon-
ger to open in some situations, such as high
ambient temperatures.
○
If you hear a hissing sound when the nozzle is
inserted into the filler pipe, wait to begin fueling
the vehicle until after the hissing sound stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when it
has been released. To finish opening the fuel door,
manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
○
If the service station fuel pump repeatedly clicks
off (stops delivering fuel) before the fuel tank
has been filled, push the fuel door release but-
ton again.
○
If pushing the fuel door release button a second
time does not correct the problem, try using a
different fuel pump. If premature fuel pump shut-
off continues to be a problem, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
○
If the fuel door does not re-latch upon closure,
push the fuel door release button again to reset
the latch. If pushing the fuel door release button
a second time does not correct the problem, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Instrument Cluster Message
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
5. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
6. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
7. Fill the vehicle with fuel. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
8. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
9. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the rear
outer edge near the center.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Place the vehicle's ignition to the RUN position (Pro-
pulsion System Not Active).
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent valve will
not open. This will result in premature fuel pump
shut-offs.
2. Access the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
3. Remove access cover in the upper right corner.
4. After removing green handle from retention bracket,
gently pull the green handle directly away from the
bracket to release the fuel door.
NOTE:
Excessive force may break cable tether.
5. Reinstall handle back into bracket when completed.
6.
Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door Access Cover Location
Fuel Door Emergency Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number
is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day
and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears
on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
NOTE:
Trailer towing is not permitted for the Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV).
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
page 160.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 160.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped), recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. TSC and a weight-distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier TW and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recre-
ational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industr y Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Model Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
Touring L FWD Yes (Road Tripper) 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Touring L AWD Yes (Road Tripper) 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,550 lb (1,610 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Limited FWD/AWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Pinnacle FWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,550 lb (1,610 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Pinnacle AWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Vehicles using an aftermar-
ket trailer hitch
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1,200 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard.
•
Trailer towing is not permitted with the hybrid vehicle.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
○
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle, full fluids, no occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
○
For calculation purposes, average weight of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
•
GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
•
CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
•
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
•
1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb [68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb
(163 kg)
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) – 360
lb (163 kg) = 845 lb
(383 kg)
845 lb (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg)
955 lb (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
545 lb (247 kg)
545lb(247kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb
(163 kg)
7 people / 1,050 lb (476 kg)
455 lb (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) = 95 lb
(43 kg)
95 lb (43 kg)
•
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
•
GAWR is found on the certification label affixed to the driver’s side door jamb.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle
page 294.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled Servic-
ing”
page 264. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Weight Distribution
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information page 291.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shift-
ing when towing. For increased engine braking on steep
downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
TRAILER TOWING — HYBRID MODELS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
•
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park
Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
(if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features
page 169.
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, for further information
page 261
.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
•
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
•
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
stated requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, fol-
low this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind
another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
•
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
•
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
•
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
•
Keep tires properly inflated.
•
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path's surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your
vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Warnings and
Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
•
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driv-
ing through standing water. Do not continue to oper-
ate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as
this may result in further damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 With
7-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5NAV With 10.1-inch Dis-
play system, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 315, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change the Customer Program-
mable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s face-
plate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
169
5
For The Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display and The
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab at
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the
radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to
show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG
[UK], L/100 km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
170 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
System Text Size This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and “Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be avail-
able. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Popups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Popups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will allow you to customize the settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 171
5
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the
system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to
show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG
[UK], L/100 km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually
closed.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
172 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In
Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will
have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic
Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The
“Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” set-
ting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Auto-
matic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or “Warning + Active Braking”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available set-
tings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense
Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide
an audible chime when an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a
visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will
turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights +
Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
MULTIMEDIA 173
5
Setting Name Description
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running, or if the engine is turned on
within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year (DD/MM/YY).
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting
will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” set-
ting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
174 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb Settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Mes-
sage” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” Settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-In This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The
“With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never”
setting will turn the Command List off.
MULTIMEDIA 175
5
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
176 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear
selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted
out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is turned off, the doors are locked, or
the key fob button is pushed. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 177
5
Setting Name Description
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn
when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The
“2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The
“Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
178 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or sense an obstacle. Selectable options are “On”
and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Sliding Door
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power sliding doors. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been acti-
vated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd row seat recline lockout. Selectable options are “Off”, “Lock On Ignition”, and “Always
Locked”.
MULTIMEDIA 179
5
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The
“+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon
can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
180 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition
OFF. The selectable options are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
Volume Adjustment This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media, Phone, Navigation, and Voice Recognition.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts The setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles linked to the system, and the various set-
tings you have saved and stored to those profiles.
Block Explicit This setting will allow you to block explicit content by turning it on or off.
Accessibility — If Equipped
When pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the system will display options related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The Accessibility feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB
Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will
announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
182 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about the version of your
radio.
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing information of your radio.
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection.
Factory Reset This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart multiple times and the backup camera, radio,
SOS, and several driving assistance features will not be available. Once the system resets, you will need to turn the vehicle
off then back on to complete the process.
184 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button makes
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN —
IF EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content
from popular apps (subscriptions may be required).
Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get informa-
tion, and watch downloaded programs all while on the
road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa are included with
the system. Press the Microphone button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa to easily find, launch, and control
content. Check sports scores, play music, control smart
home devices, or see your live camera feeds (compat-
ible smart home device required and sold separately).
In addition to streaming and downloaded content,
changing the input in Fire TV also enables you to:
•
Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™ Discs.
•
Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices.
•
Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port.
•
Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones
(not included, customer will have to provide their
own or play audio through in-cabin speakers with
Listen In feature in front seat).
•
Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only.
•
Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together.
NOTE:
Vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular range
and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system
and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV package.
Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection and registered
Amazon account to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Stream-
ing service subscriptions are not included. Services and
features are subject to change or withdrawal at any
time, may not be available in all areas and languages,
and may require separate subscriptions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA 185
5
GETTING STARTED
There are three different ways to operate the features
of Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
•
VoiceRemotewithAlexa
•
Front radio screen
•
Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV built-in touch on each rear
screen
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN FROM THE FRONT RADIO
SCREEN
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touch-
screen. You may need to navigate to different pages
in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect Theater
button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN FROM THE REAR
SCREENS
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system from the rear screens by just flipping
the screens open. Flipping open the rear screens will
automatically turn the system on. Tapping either rear
screen will also turn on the system for that respective
screen.
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch
with Fire TV.
FIRST TIME STARTING UP (USING
THE REAR SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from the
rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the sys-
tem displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa
(two are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes with
Alexa are included to be paired with each rear screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
Some options for a network connection are:
•
Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if acti-
vated, it will show as a possible network for the sys-
tem on the screen).
•
Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
•
In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
Rear Seat Entertainment For Uconnect 5/5 NAV
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — HDMI Port
4 — USB C Charging Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
186 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place
using the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an
unlimited Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during
this update. After this first-time update, updates will
only occur when one is available.
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your Ama-
zon account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
•
I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
•
I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the
on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the
system.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time
set up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will give
the options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Paren-
tal Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected,
follow the on-screen steps to set up parental controls
for the system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is
simple to get started using this feature. Push the Micro-
phone button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa
to activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front
radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button
in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2.
This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio
through all the speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing
the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa.
Some options of the quick menu are:
•
Power — This will power the screen off.
•
On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the
on-screen remote to use with the system.
•
Back — This will let you go back a page.
•
Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
•
Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain set-
tings in the system. For more setting options, select
“Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings
menu.
•
Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the
Are We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE
REAR SCREENS)
If parental controls were not set during the first time
start up of the system, they can be set by following
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen to access Settings in
the “quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
PAIRING (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again
or a new remote is being paired, follow these
procedures:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon on
the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a
Voice Remote with Alexa that has become
disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for
each rear screen.
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING
THE FRONT RADIO AND REAR
SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs”
are “Fire TV”, “HDMI”, “Blu-ray™”, “DVD”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the
Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input
under “Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the
top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on
the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options
by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or
Right to navigate on-screen for selections and push-
ing the center button to confirm selections.
3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen.
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume
and + button to increase the volume.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide
for the system.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10. App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11. Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast for-
ward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
14. Play/Pause Button || — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button
on the Channel button to browse channels avail-
ableinFireTV.
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content
on Fire TV.
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options
forFireTV.
18. App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19. Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle
menu.
Voice Remote With Alexa
188 MULTIMEDIA
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Batteries
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batter-
ies for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recy-
cling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN STREAMING
(USING THE FRONT RADIO AND
REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the
bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”,
and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will
give access to different media within Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse
Media” and include:
•
Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This
option will be selectable on the left slider menu in
“Browse Media”. While in “Browse Media” under
Fire TV, it will display recent activity under “Recent”.
This will display recent videos viewed from Fire TV
and recent downloads as well.
•
USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
•
USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options
for streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”, or
“App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Select-
ing one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with
Alexa will take you to the home page for that respective
streaming service. Turning on either of the rear screens
will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will
always launch in Fire TV. More streaming options can
be selected on the Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system for
streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when
Fire TV is turned on for the first time from the rear
screens. Some of these options can be an in-vehicle 4G
Wi-Fi hot spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile
device, or Wi-Fi from an outside source like a home or a
garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front touchscreen, rear seat screen, and
then “Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
Viewing from the front radio screen mirrors or controls
the Fire TV experience from one of the rear Fire TV
displays.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for
“Home”, “Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
•
Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
•
Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles
between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio
screen only).
•
Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen,
this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
•
Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
•
Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
•
Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
•
Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire
TV home page.
•
Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
•
Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must be
in an active and usable cellular range and properly
equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a
Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account are
required to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features
are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may
not be available in all areas and languages, and may
require separate subscriptions.
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ OR DVD —
IF EQUIPPED
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Front Radio Screen
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player is located under the
radio controls in the instrument panel.
2. Press the Media button on the bottom menu bar.
Then press the Rear Entertainment tab on the top
menu bar. Then select “Launch Source” on the radio
touchscreen.
3. Select the Blu-ray™ or DVD under inputs in the
Launch Source menu
4. To play a Blu-ray™ or DVD disc on both screens
simultaneously, select “Launch Source” and then
under Inputs, select “View Screen 1 or 2”.
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Rear Screens
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
2. Scroll down on the Fire TV Home screen and select
Blu-ray™ or DVD input under “Input”.
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES (USING THE
REAR SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system
and select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page,
select “App store®”. Within the App store® you can
purchase apps and games. From here you can also
select from all the apps and games that have been
purchased.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play
your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB
drive into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player.
The USB drive port is located under the radio controls in
the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the
USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs.
Use the search feature to find your media faster.
DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
1 — DVD/Blu-ray™ Player
2 — USB Port
190 MULTIMEDIA
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power
limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
page 83.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need
to provide their own wireless headphones that can be
paired with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers
can also use their own wired headphones and plug
them into a Headphone Jack located under one of the
rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat Entertain-
ment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens, follow
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
output audio at a time.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in page 67.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls include:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC
SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The
temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
192 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Compliance information about
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the
rear screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and
then “Legal & Compliance”.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor-
mance does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 318.
MULTIMEDIA 193
5
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con-
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop)
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REGENERATIVE BRAKING SYSTEM
(RBS)
The RBS replenishes the vehicle's high voltage battery
during deceleration, and is particularly useful in stop-
and-go city traffic. The electric motors that propel the
vehicle forward can operate as generators when brak-
ing. The RBS recharges the high voltage battery under
certain braking conditions by recapturing energy that
would otherwise be lost while braking. The electric
power that is generated goes back into the high voltage
battery for later use, for example, when acceleration is
desired.
194
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The
RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service
brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled mainte-
nance, and service intervals for the vehicle brakes must
be followed.
AUDIBLE PEDESTRIAN WARNING
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning system. The Audible Pedestrian Warning sys-
tem uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that your
vehicle is approaching. In addition, the module will indi-
cate changes in vehicle speed by varying the relative
volume.
The system uses an in-vehicle sound synthesizer with
two external speakers. One is located in the under-hood
compartment and the other is in the rear of the vehicle.
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is active when
the vehicle is not in PARK and is stopped or traveling at
lower speeds. Depending on the selected gear
(REVERSE, DRIVE, LOW or NEUTRAL), the system acti-
vates the corresponding speaker location based on the
intended direction of travel.
NOTE:
The system is active when driving in Electric mode only.
WARNING!
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is not
intended to avoid a collision. It is always the driver's
responsibility to be attentive to the vehicle’s distance
between other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while driv-
ing to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in a collision or seri-
ous personal injury.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS).These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
SAFETY 195
6
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC
module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that
the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the
driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active, is the
torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sen-
sitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the brak-
ing torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to pre-
vent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instabil-
ity, and to prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change
of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suf-
ficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road con-
ditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects or other
vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting these conditions. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
196 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti-
vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow
more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momen-
tarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter partial mode
“Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentar-
ily pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
SAFETY 197
6
•
The driver door must be closed.
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
page 169.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notifica-
tion of the possible presence of an object, passenger,
or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to
10 minutes before the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When the
previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the mes-
sage “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster dis-
play and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver plac-
ing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 169.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
198 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC can-
not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution
when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
page 160.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system moni-
tors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles
in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equip-
ment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in false detections. The BSM Warning
Light may even remain illuminated the entire time
the vehicle is in a forward gear.
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mir-
ror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY 199
6
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contaminants so the BSM system can func-
tion properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with for-
eign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contaminants or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage,
cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on again
to reset the system.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
page 202.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv-
ing to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will
issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Sensor Location
Warning Light Location
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
200 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This
is normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 318.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
SAFETY 201
6
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
your vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the
system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the
opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn-
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes. If a pedestrian is encountered in
the path at the same speed threshold, the system will
attempt to bring the vehicle to a stop.
202 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
page 318.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 169.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the sys-
tem provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and
provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium"
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW Message
SAFETY 203
6
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality”, “FCW Limited Functionality”, “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”, or “FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momen-
tarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW function-
ality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
•
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•
FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
tions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system which provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings in the instru-
ment cluster display, and may apply automatic braking
when it detects a potential frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate
the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the
PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes. When the system determines a col-
lision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
page 169.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system will
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
PEB Message
204 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low
tire pressure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message. When this occurs
you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
page 291 for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value
page 318.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
SAFETY 205
6
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indi-
cate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
•
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1.
The compact spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a different color pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi-
tion, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
206 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" mes-
sage and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a differ-
ent color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehi-
cle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assem-
blies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do
not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes
(--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 225.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 225.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SAFETY 207
6
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 315 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
208 SAFETY
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
SAFETY 209
6
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in
the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate
and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any, slack so it is comfortable
and not resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
210 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoul-
der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi-
tion the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any, slack so it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row cen-
ter seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate
and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from
the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of
the way in the headliner for added convenience to open
up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
behind the second or third row seat.
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Adjustable Anchorage
Mini-Latch Stowage
Mini-Latch Plate
SAFETY 211
6
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in
the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The
seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
into its stowed position.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
Insert Regular Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle Slot To
Detach
212 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by
an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to pro-
vide proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the pre-
ceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat-
tach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
SAFETY 213
6
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem. The figures illustrate the locking feature for each
seating position
page 233.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Seven Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Seven Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Eight Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
214 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above
the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seat
belt securely.
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold
the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third
row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip
while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the
webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
ously injured in an accident as a result.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
ThirdRowStowClip
SAFETY 215
6
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately
page 111.
216 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Pas-
senger Knee Air Bag
SAFETY 217
6
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla-
tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
218 SAFETY
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen-
gers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work-
ing improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
Seated Properly
SAFETY 219
6
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
220 SAFETY
If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
SAFETY 221
6
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of
the SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are
located should remain free from any obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the
Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a
left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (S ABIC)
Label Location
222 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
SAFETY 223
6
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
•
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF)
position to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after per-
forming the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed
to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure (Hybrid Vehicles)
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the high voltage battery and engine,
the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the hazard flashers, inte-
rior lights, power door locks, or the HVAC blower motor,
the ignition switch must be changed from START or
ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
224 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://tc.canada.ca/en/road-transportation/
child-car-seat-safety
SAFETY 225
6
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear sup-
port leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of
car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function
as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and
your child may be more severely injured as a result.
226 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
SAFETY 227
6
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Seven Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
228 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Seven Passenger Quad Seat LATCH Positions (Includes
(Stow ‘n Go)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 229
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint
in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Quad and Stow 'n Go head
restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints
are not removable
page 53.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
Seven Passenger Quad and Stow ‘n Go Seating
230 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind all second row seating positions. The
third row has a tether anchor on the 40%
seat for the right outboard position and in
the center of the 60% seat for either the center or left
outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
Eight Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown) Seven Passenger Bench Seating
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorage
Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Seven Passenger
Quad and Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Eight Passenger
Anchorage Shown)
SAFETY 231
6
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the
right outboard position behind the front passenger (1).
Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not
have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position
in your vehicle.
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard posi-
tion, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors
or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
•
Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
•
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please see
page 232 for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
page 233 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 236 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
Center Seat LATCH Positions
232 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description for addi-
tional information on ALR
page 214.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 233
6
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint
in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Quad and Stow 'n Go head
restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints
are not removable
page 53.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
Seven Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
234 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 236 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat following the steps above. When the
car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch
plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch
the seatbelt securely.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
SAFETY 235
6
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of
the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature.
Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as
described in the steps above or move the car seat to a
different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
page 228 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Second Row Tether Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. You may need to move the seat forward to pro-
vide better access to the tether anchorage. If there
is no top tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Eight Passenger
236 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60%
seat in the third row may be used by either the left out-
board or the center seating position. Only tether one
child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchor-
age for either seating position on the 60% third row
seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the
inboard (left) side of the head restraint support
posts, as shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row Seven
Passenger Quad and Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
SAFETY 237
6
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60%
seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for
one child restraint at a time.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber-
security”
page 117.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault
is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 207.
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
238 SAFETY
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use
a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA US LLC
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
SAFETY 239
6
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
240 SAFETY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 318.
•
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
241
7
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button on
the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button
on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview
Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and ASSIST
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once
a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an
SOS operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connection is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed. Once the SOS opera-
tor opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
SOS Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an authorized dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s air bags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
side Assistance will know what vehicle is being
driven and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside assistance.
•
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
7
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and Portable Air Compres-
sor (if equipped) or Tire Service Kit (if equipped) are
stowed behind an access panel on the left hand side of
the vehicle.
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service
Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding
the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from
the storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Scan me
Wheel Blocked Example
Jacking Equipment Location
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Turn the jack screw counterclockwise to remove the
jack from the storage area behind the tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
Jack Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
7
Detailed information about the inflatable spare tire, its
use, and operation
page 301.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each
side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the
sill flange of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper jack-
ing locations.
Extending The Wrench
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
Rear Lif ting Point
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn clock-
wise until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-
wise using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only
until the tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the compact spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand.
Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel
off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in
the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be dam-
aged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to
the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tighten-
ing the nuts with the wrench. After inflation, once
the vehicle is lowered you will have a second oppor-
tunity to torque the lug nuts
page 309.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 bar) using the Portable Air Compressor
page 249 or Tire Service Kit if equipped
page 250.
Rear Jacking Location Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
7
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has
reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has
been removed from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice
page 309. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
an authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as
soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment
and place the access panel back. The stud of the
storage area must be threaded through the lower
part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clock-
wise to secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels
with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mount-
ing studs which are on each side of the valve stem.
Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all
the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub
and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully
tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can
damage the threads, cause vibration, and under-
mine safety.
Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice
page 309. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are prop-
erly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air Com-
pressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in the
side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflat-
able tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the stor-
age location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions section.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire as
described in the Jacking Instructions sec-
tion in this manual. Make sure that the
valve stem is located near the ground,
and then screw the air hose of the Portable Air Com-
pressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it to
the vehicles 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Always start the engine before turning
ON the Portable Air Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 bar) recom-
mended as per the label on the wheel or,
if equipped, with the inflatable spare tire
pressure indicated on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Label located on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button to
reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the recommended
pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack
as described in the Jacking Instructions
section.
9. Remove the speed limit label sticker from
the Portable Air Compressor and place it
on the center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam
tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam
tray in the cargo area.
Portable Air Compressor
1—PowerPlug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
7
WARNING!
•
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
•
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
•
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat sources.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return the inflatable spare tire to its storage location:
1. Return the Jack.
2. Use the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor
to deflate the spare tire. Use the deflation button,
see the Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare tire will
return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compres-
sor (if equipped) and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to
1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F
(-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
Remove the rear panel to access the Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, Tire Service Kit
storage locations may vary.
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap, and is
stored under the load floor within the second row.
Scan me
Tire Service Kit Access Panel Location — If Equipped
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit Location — If Equipped
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following sym-
bols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
•
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
•
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
•
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
•
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
•
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum opera-
tion of the system. See the Sealant Bottle Replace-
ment in this section for further information.
•
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
•
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the mate-
rial from the vehicle or tire and wheel components.
Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off
and properly discarded.
•
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before connect-
ing the Tire Service Kit.
•
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in
the tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
•
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
•
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
•
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
•
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8—PowerPlug
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
7
WARNING!
•
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as pos-
sible, if there is any contact with clothing.
•
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit
flat on the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the seal-
ant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into
the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Seal-
ant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until seal-
ant is no longer flowing through hose
(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the
sealant flows through the Sealant Hose,
the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
is empty. Continue to operate the pump
and inflate the tire to the cold tire infla-
tion pressure found on the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation Label located in the driver-side door open-
ing. Check the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge.
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within 15 minutes:
•
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation But-
ton to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the
steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution
of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail-
ure to follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and oth-
ers around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
•
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit
flat on the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
•
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
•
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at
the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pres-
sure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold
tire inflation pressure found on the Tire
And Loading Information Label located in
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
7
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
•
For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
•
Replacement sealant bottles are available at autho-
rized service centers.
JUMP STARTING — GAS MODELS
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Hose Location
Remove The Bottle Cover
Rotate The Bottle Up
Remove The Bottle
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START —
GAS MODELS
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the posi-
tive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over the
positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE —
GAS MODELS
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Battery Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
7
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post near the wind-
shield cowl (exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the vehicle starts, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The rear 12 Volt DC outlet is not controlled by the
vehicle’s ignition (the outlet provides power even
when the ignition is OFF). Accessories (i.e., cellular
devices, ect.) plugged into the rear 12 Volt power out-
let may draw sufficient power, even when they are
OFF (in standby mode), to discharge the vehicle’s
12 Volt battery. If the device is allowed to continue
drawing power, eventually the vehicle’s 12 Volt bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
JUMP STARTING — HYBRID MODELS
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-on
the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage bat-
tery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery, provide elec-
tric vehicle operation, and to start the vehicle's gas
engine. If the 12 Volt battery has been discharged, the
vehicle can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been dis-
charged, it will need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
•
If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
•
If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt power
to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting the
transmission from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N).
Power provided by the jumper cables will also allow
the Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully
move the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge loca-
tion. While the vehicle is being moved, the external
12 Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that con-
trol of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12 Volt
power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's transmis-
sion may engage PARK. Do not allow the jumper cables
to come in contact with each other or to the vehicle,
this will result in a short.
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the Electric Park
Brake, and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START —
HYBRID MODELS
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the posi-
tive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over the
positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Battery Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
7
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE —
HYBRID MODELS
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post near the wind-
shield cowl (exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cycle the ignition to ON/RUN in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. After a couple minutes (depending on the level of
12 Volt battery discharge), attempt to start the
vehicle. Once the vehicle starts, follow the discon-
necting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The rear 12 Volt DC outlet is not controlled by the
vehicle’s ignition (the outlet provides power even
when the ignition is OFF). Accessories (i.e., cellular
devices, ect.) plugged into the rear 12 Volt power out-
let may draw sufficient power, even when they are
OFF (in standby mode), to discharge the vehicle’s
12 Volt battery. If the device is allowed to continue
drawing power, eventually the vehicle’s 12 Volt bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system. If emergency refueling is neces-
sary, use an approved gas can and insert the refueling
funnel into the fuel filler pipe opening. Take care to
open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door by pushing at the rear center edge to unlatch.
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear storage area.
2. Insert funnel into the fuel filler pipe opening.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
Refueling Funnel
Fuel Funnel Location
Inserting Funnel
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
7
•
Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain con-
trol of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park
Release. If possible, you should apply the parking
brake. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual
Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to
serious injury or death for those in or around the
vehicle.
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted bat-
tery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the
lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected
to a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far
as it will go, then release it. The transmission should
now be in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
moved.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and rein-
stall the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Tether Strap
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
•
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEU-
TRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press
the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
•
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
page 196. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front ACCEPTABLE METHOD NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
7
NOTE:
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels
are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric
Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer pro-
grammable features in the Uconnect Settings.
•
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the EPB is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located
on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are prop-
erly seated and secured in the attachment points.
•
This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
•
Use approved receptacle location to free the dis-
abled vehicle from its environment.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
•
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
•
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
•
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
•
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Recovery load should:
•
Be applied at constant speed.
•
Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
•
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the igni-
tion is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal
is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable
the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's door is
opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then releasing
the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the trans-
mission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle
page 260.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Front Recovery Points
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
•
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact. Detailed information
can be found on
page 224.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
page 225.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer towing, extremely
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when
the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer
page 103.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level.
•
Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect 12 Volt battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
264
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:23456789101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary X XXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X XXXXXX
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
** X
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and battery coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
**
XX
Replace PCV valve X
** Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal damage. If any coolant needs to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 8 — Battery
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID MODELS (IF EQUIPPED)
1 — Battery Coolant Reservoir
1
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir
1
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 10 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
1
See an authorized dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water
page 254.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
page 313.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
8
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are
unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 264.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of a belt from rib to
rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to
replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not
across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or
severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
•
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
•
Rib or belt wear
•
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
•
Belt slips
•
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
•
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
•
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools; we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information located online, for further
warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an autho-
rized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG com-
pressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension
tether. Detach the glove compartment tension tether
by sliding the black tension tether clip down, and
popping it out of the slot on the side of the glove
compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either
side of the glove compartment door. To release
them, push inward on each travel stop, and pull the
glove compartment door down until the travel stops
pass clear of their hooking points.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
8
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible
to gain access to the cabin air filter compartment
cover.
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment snap,
and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a
small space on the side of each snap to use for
separating the lid from the snap. Once detached,
remove the rest of the snap completely from the
compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment
cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air
filter. Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi-
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into
their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap
lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near
closed position to reengage the glove compart-
ment travel stops. Finally, pull the glove compart-
ment tension tether clip down and slide it back into
the slot on the side of the glove compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
•
Wear or uneven edges
•
Foreign material
•
Hardening or cracking
•
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to sepa-
rate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
8
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and
the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from
the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4.
Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to
wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand
hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away
from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the recep-
tacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3.
Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain car-
bon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you
page 238.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items can come into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate
your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to the manufacturer specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
8
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec-
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM
IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 264.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information page 313.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or anti-rust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When add-
ing engine coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
8
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
COOLING SYSTEM — HYBRID
MODELS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING!
•
Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Do not put your hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
near the radiator cooling fan. The fan may start at
any time, whether the ignition is on or off.
This vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan
mounted behind the radiator that starts automatically,
and may start at any time. Your vehicle may determine
the fan needs to start and to run if vehicle coolant is
too hot, or if the ambient air temperature is too high.
Even after the vehicle is turned off, the fan may start
without warning and run for several minutes. Be aware
of this if you are working in the engine compartment.
Always keep fingers and tools away from the fan blades.
The radiator fan and surrounding components must be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) every 12 months
(before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system should
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
NOTE:
If the engine coolant is changed for low temperature
capability, you must also change the coolant for the
Electric/Battery systems
page 279.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec-
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM
IS HOT.
Cooling Fan Warning Label
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine or electrical system damage. If
any coolant is needed to be added to the system please
contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 264.
Electric/Battery Coolant System
These coolant systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is speci-
fied on the reservoir, contact an authorized dealer for
service.
These systems require the use of high purity water,
such as deionized, or distilled water, when mixing the
water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of
lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the cooling systems. If the coolant level of
the battery coolant system is low, the Hybrid Electric
Vehicle System Service Light will be illuminated on the
instrument cluster.
Selection Of Coolant
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing
this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant that meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Stan-
dard MS.90032. When adding coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032 and deionized, or distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are
anticipated.
CAUTION!
Use only high purity water such as deionized, or dis-
tilled water when mixing the water/ coolant (anti-
freeze) solution for the engine, battery or high voltage
electronics cooling systems. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
8
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
•
Mixing coolant types is not recommended and can
result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, if the proper
OAT coolant is not available, add only water to the
cooling system, then have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Under no cir-
cumstances should HOAT coolant be added to the
cooling system.
•
Low pressure expansion bottles for power electron-
ics and battery cooling require a special tool for
removing the cap from the expansion bottle. For the
battery coolant bottle, it is important to not add
coolant if level is low. The vehicle should be taken to
an authorized dealer for proper servicing of the bat-
tery coolant loop if this should occur.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emer-
gency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of the engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at a minimum of
50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
deionized, or distilled water.
•
Use only high purity water such as deionized, or dis-
tilled water when mixing the water/coolant solution
for the engine, battery or high voltage electronics
cooling systems. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
cooling system.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
•
The coolant freeze point in the battery and power
electronics loop should be checked by an authorized
dealer as a special tool is required to remove the
cap from those expansion bottles.
•
Electric/Battery coolant system must be serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the coolant level is below
what is specified on the reservoir, contact an autho-
rized dealer for service. These systems require the
use of high purity water such as deionized, or distilled
water when mixing the water and coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the cooling systems.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 264.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately if
the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. How-
ever, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
page 314.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
page 314. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
page 314. It is important to maintain the transmis-
sion fluid at the correct level using the recommended
fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
page 314.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
tains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit
breakers and relays. A label that identifies each compo-
nent is printed on the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located
at each side of the PDC cover, avoid using screwdrivers
or any other tool to remove the cover, since they may
apply excessive force and result in a broken/damaged
part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two
locks.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of the following fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and content.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F06 – – Not Populated
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil / Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Populated
Power Distribution Center Location
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Populated
F11 – – Not Populated
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (S) *
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC / EXT LIGHTS
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Populated
F23 – – Not Populated
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25 – 10 Amp Red
Hands-Free Dr Mod / Active Grille Shutter
/ Pwr Mirror / VRM
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28 – 10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port / USB+(IP) / Video USB
Port / Overhead DVD Player(Aftermarket)
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB / Power Lumbar *
F31 – – Not Populated
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof *
F36 – – Not Populated
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC / Exterior Lights
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Populated
F41 – – Not Populated
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC / Interior Lights
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Populated
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Populated
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition
System (KIN) / ESL / DVD
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F56 – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control Module /
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) /
Electronic Steering Lock (ESL) / ESP /
ESC
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power Transfer
Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo Pwr Outlet
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Populated
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) /
Parktronics System (PTS)/Drivers Assist
System Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Populated
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – – Not Populated
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights*
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR Center Stack
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / Center Display / Telematics
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment / Media HUB / USB(S)
/ Rain Sensor / Sunroof / RR View Mirror/
Overhead DVD Player / INT Monitoring
Camera
F78 – 15 Amp Blue TCM (ZF) / E-Shifter / Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / SCCM/ EPB SW
F80 – – Not Populated
F81 – – Not Populated
F82 – – Not Populated
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD *
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Populated
F87 – – Not Populated
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Populated
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering
Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC/RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F97 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elect Brake Module *
F100 – 10 Amp Red
Headlamp Level / RR Camera / Blindspot
/ Humidity SNSR / In Car Temp SNSR /
Headlamp SW *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR
PWR Window Lockout
30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Interior Bulbs — Halogen
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
Exterior Bulbs — Halogen
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Turn Signal Lamp WY21W / 7440NA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
into the housing, and rotate the front turn signal
lamp socket clockwise to lock it in place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel
liner and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp
socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assem-
bly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to lock into
place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1—
US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard in this manual
page 160.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing,
page 160.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
the Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode
page 205.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
page 299.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven.
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
page 298. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on
the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more infor-
mation relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of
a tire
page 292.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity, other than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a mountain/snowflake sym-
bol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow
tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
page 250.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 165.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage:
•
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
•
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
•
Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Touring
Touring L
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited
Pinnacle
235/60R18
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FWD Hybrid
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Touring L
Limited
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Pinnacle 235/60R18
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Touring L
Front 235/60R18 9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before fur-
ther use.
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not require retightening.
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, driv-
ing, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed
page 264.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
MODELS (IF EQUIPPED)
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
•
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location with the windows open slightly.
•
Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
•
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the 12 Volt battery will prevent the
High Voltage (HV) Battery from accepting a charge
from the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE).
Also, the vehicle will not condition the HV Battery (if
needed and connected to a powered EVSE). If the
HV Battery is not able to condition itself and it
becomes cold enough (or hot enough), the vehicle
will not start until the HV Battery’s cell temperatures
are between -22°F (-30°C) and 122°F (50°C).
•
If you do not disconnect the battery from the electri-
cal system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
•
Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on
and high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrica-
tion of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
back into operation.
•
Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever
possible.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
NOTE:
The hybrid has a feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every 21 days. This feature charges the 12 Volt
battery from the high voltage battery. This will happen
as long as the high voltage battery remains above the
minimum state of charge
page 122.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to get rid of any deposits.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
Vehicle Identification Number
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
309
9
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded regular gasoline having a
posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline
is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Torque Pattern
310 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX
FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso-
line with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Undesirable lean conditions
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
•
Poor engine performance
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California refor-
mulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 311
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 gal 71 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 15 qt 14.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — HYBRID
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 17 gal 64 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 17.3 qt 16.4 L
Battery Coolant 4.5 qt 4.3 L
Power Electronics Coolant 3.6 qt 3.4 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
NOTE:
Battery Coolant and Power Electronics Coolant reservoir require a special tool to service the coolant system. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
312 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst
trademark
page 269.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease cor-
rosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — HYBRID
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant, Battery Coolant, Power Electric
Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst
trademark.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 313
9
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease cor-
rosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — HYBRID
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. Use only recommended brake fluids.
314 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.,
400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR,
WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club
of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks,
CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
315
10
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reim-
burse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that ser-
vice in the area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s
determination relating to reimbursement is final. Corre-
spondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis-
patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram
dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
316 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser-
vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to owners.mopar.ca/en/ for
further information.
For French, refer to owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
Scan me
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 317
10
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Change Of Ownership Or Address
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
318 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 319
10
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.................309
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .136, 138
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .........277
Additives,Fuel...................311
Adjust
Down......................49
Forward ....................49
Rearward....................49
Up.......................49
AirBag......................217
Air Bag Operation ...............218
Air Bag Warning Light ...........216,218
Driver Knee Air Bag ..............221
Enhanced Accident Response ......224,263
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........263
FrontAirBag .................218
If Deployment Occurs .............223
Knee Impact Bolsters .............221
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........224
Maintenance .................224
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......216
Side Air Bags .................221
Transporting Pets ...............238
AirBagLight..............111,216,238
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ....270
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............271
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .............271
Air Conditioner System...............271
Air Conditioning Filter .............77,271
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........76
AirFilter......................270
Air Pressure
Tires .....................297
Alarm
Arm The System ................30
Disarm The System ...............30
Security Alarm .................113
All Wheel Drive
Towing ....................263
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...............134
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................8
Amazon FireTV ................185,189
Amazon FireTV Built-In...............185
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......276,279,312
Disposal .................277,280
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........194
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..............113
Assist, Hill Start ..................197
Audio Jack .....................80
Audio Systems (Radio) ...............169
AutomaticDimmingMirror .............56
Automatic Headlights ................64
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........76
Automatic Transaxle ................128
Automatic Transmission ..............129
AddingFluid...............282, 314
Fluid And Filter Change ............282
Fluid Change .................282
Fluid Level Check ............281,282
FluidType ................282, 314
Special Additives ...............281
AutoPark...................119,123
AutoUpPowerWindows ..............85
AUXCord......................80
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......
81
AWD
Towing ....................263
Axle Lubrication ..................314
B
Back Up Camera .................154
Battery .................13,111,268
Charging ....................15
Charging System Light .............111
Jump Starting ..............254, 256
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........21
Battery Saver Feature................65
Belts, Seat ....................238
BlindSpotMonitoring...............199
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........272
B-Pillar Location..................294
Brake Assist System ................195
Brake Control System, Electronic..........195
Brake Fluid ....................314
Brake System ................281,309
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................309
Fluid Check ...............281,314
Master Cylinder ................281
Parking....................126
Warning Light .................111
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........129
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............65
Bulb Replacement ..............289, 290
Bulbs,Light...............239, 289, 290
320
C
Camera......................154
Camera, Rear ................154,155
Capacities, Fluid..................312
Caps, Filler
Fuel...................157,158
Oil (Engine) ..................266
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .......277,280
Carbon Monoxide Warning .............240
Cargo
Vehicle Loading .................91
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .................95
Cargo Load Floor ..................91
Car Washes ....................306
Cellular Phone ..................193
Certification Label.................160
Chains, Tire ....................302
Change Oil Indicator ................105
Changing A Flat Tire ................244
Charging ......................15
Chart, Tire Sizing .................292
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .118
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........238
Checks, Safety ..................238
Child Restraint ..................225
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................227
Center Seat LATCH ..............232
Child Seat Installation ..........233, 235
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....233
Infant And Child Restraints ...........226
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....228
Older Children And Child Restraints ......227
Seating Positions ...............228
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ........236
Clean Air Gasoline .................310
Cleaning
Wheels ....................301
Climate Control ...................67
Automatic ...................67
Manual .....................72
Rear ....................71,75
Cold Weather Operation ..............122
Compact Spare Tire ................300
Contract, Service .................317
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....277,280
Cooling System................276,278
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........277
Coolant Level ..............277,280
Cooling Capacity ................312
Disposal Of Used Coolant .........277,280
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..........276,279
Inspection ...........276,277,278,280
PointsToRemember..............277
Pressure
Cap ..............277,280
Radiator Cap ...............277,280
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ..........276,279,312,313
Corrosion Protection................306
Cruise Control ...................136
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...........138
Cruise Light .................116,117
Customer Assistance ...............315
Cybersecurity ...................169
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............62
Dealer Service ..................269
Defroster, Windshield ...............239
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............66
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............117
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ....................62
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................268
Disable Vehicle Towing...............261
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........277,280
Door Ajar ..................111,112
Door Ajar Light ................111,112
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............38
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water.....................168
E
Electric Brake Control System ...........195
Anti-Lock Brake System ............194
Traction Control System ............199
Electric Parking Brake ...............126
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........196
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......112
Emergency Braking ................204
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ............241
Jacking .................244,245
Jump Starting ..............254, 256
Overheating ..................259
Towing ....................261
Emission Control System Maintenance .......118
Engine ......................266
Air Cleaner ..................270
Block Heater .................125
Break-In Recommendations ..........126
Checking Oil Level ...............268
Compartment.................266
Compartment Identification ..........266
INDEX 321
11
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............313
Cooling..................276,278
Exhaust Gas Caution .............240
Fails To Start .................121
Flooded, Starting ...............121
Fuel Requirements ..............310
Oil .................269, 312, 313
Oil Filler Cap .................266
OilFilter....................270
Oil Selection ...............269, 312
Oil Synthetic .................269
Overheating ..................259
Starting .................119,122
Engine Oil Life
................105
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . .224, 263
Ethanol ......................310
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...............240
Exhaust System ...............240,275
Exterior Lighting ................62, 290
Exterior Lights ...........62, 239, 289, 290
F
FamCam System .................157
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................270
Air Conditioning ..............77,271
Engine Oil ...................270
Engine Oil Disposal ..............269
FireTV ......................189
Flashers
Hazard Warning ................241
Turn Signals ..........62,116,239, 290
Flash-To-Pass ..................62, 63
Flat Tire Changing............244,291,300
FlatTireStowage............250, 291, 300
Flooded Engine Starting ..............121
Fluid, Brake ....................314
Fluid Capacities ..................312
Fluid Leaks ....................240
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................281
Engine Oil ...................268
Fog Lights ...................62,64
Fold-Flat Seats ...................38
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ..........45
Forward Collision Warning .............202
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............261
FrontPositionLight................290
Fuel........................310
Additives ...................311
CleanAir ...................310
Ethanol ....................310
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...........157,158
Gasoline ...................310
Materials Added ................311
Methanol ...................310
Octane Rating ..............310,313
Requirements .................310
Specifications .................313
Tank Capacity .................312
Fuses.......................282
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........59
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...........157,158
Gasoline, Clean Air ................310
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................310
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............310
Gear Ranges ...................129
Glass Cleaning ..................308
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............161
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............161
GVWR.......................160
H
Hands-Free Sliding Door ..............35
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water ...........168
Hazard Warning Flashers .............241
Headlights .....................62
Cleaning ...................306
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......62
Lights On Reminder .............62, 64
Passing ...................62, 63
Switch .....................62
TimeDelay...................62
Washers ....................64
Head Restraints ..................53
Heated Mirrors .................56, 58
Heated Seats....................52
Heater, Engine Block ...............125
High Voltage Battery ................13
Hill Start Assist ..................197
Hitches
TrailerTowing.................162
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) .........59
Hood Prop .....................87
Hood Release ...................87
I
Ignition.......................23
Keyless Ignition PHEV ..............24
Switch .....................23
322 INDEX
Indicator Lights
Blue .....................117
Green .....................116
White.....................117
Yellow.....................116
InsideRearviewMirror.............56, 241
Instrument Cluster ..............101,103
Display ....................103
MenuItems..................105
Instrument Cluster
..............101
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........308
Interior And Instrument Lights............65
Interior Appearance Care .............307
Interior Lights ...................65
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .........66
Inverter
Power .....................83
J
Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped ...244
Jack Location ...................244
Jack Operation ..................244
Jump Starting ................254, 256
K
KeyFob ......................20
Arm The System ................30
Disarm The Alarm ................30
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........22
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....22
KeylessEnter'nGo™................31
Passive Entry ..................31
Keys........................20
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...........62
Lane Change Assist ...............62, 65
LaneSense ....................152
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................209
Latches ......................239
Hood ......................87
Lead Free Gasoline ................310
Leaks, Fluid ....................240
LifeOfTires....................299
Liftgate.......................88
Hands-Free ...................89
Power .....................88
LightBulbs .................239, 290
Lights.......................239
AirBag...............111,216,238
Anti Lock Brake System ............113
Automatic Emergency Braking OFF .......116
Battery Saver ..................65
Brake Assist Warning .............197
Brake Warning ................111
Bulb Replacement ............289, 290
Cruise ..................116,117
Daytime Running ................62
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............62
Electric Power Steering Fault ..........112
Electronic Park Brake .............114
Electronic Stability Control Active ........114
Electronic Throttle Control ...........112
Engine Temperature Warning .........112
Exterior .................239, 290
Fog....................64,116
Headlights .................62,64
High Beam ..................117
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........62
Hood Open ..................112
Instrument Cluster ...............62
Intensity Control ................65
Interior.....................65
LaneSense .............114,116,117
Liftgate Open .................112
Lights On Reminder .............62, 64
LowFuel ...................115
Low Washer Fluid ...............115
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......114
Oil Pressure ..................112
Oil Temperature ................112
Park...................116,117
Passing ...................62, 63
Reading ....................65
Seat Belt Reminder ..............113
Security Alarm .................113
Service....................289
Service Automatic Emergency Braking .....115
ServiceAWD .................115
Service LaneSense ..............115
Service Stop Start System ...........115
SideMarker..................290
Smar
tBeams ..................63
Stop Start Active ................116
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........115
Traction Control ................197
Transmission Temperature ...........113
Turn Signals ..........62,116,239, 290
Load Floor, Cargo ..................91
Loading Vehicle ................91,160
Tires .....................294
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..........110
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............110
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction........110
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........110
INDEX 323
11
Locks
Automatic Door .................30
Child Protection .................30
Manual .....................30
Power Door ...................30
Low Tire Pressure System .............205
Lubrication, Body .................272
Luggage Carrier ..................95
LugNuts.....................309
M
Maintenance ....................87
Maintenance Free Battery .............268
Maintenance Schedule ..............264
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .114, 118
Manual
Park Release .................260
Service....................318
Map/Reading Lights ................65
Marker Lights, Side ................290
MediaHub.....................80
Memory Seat ....................37
Methanol .....................310
Mirrors.......................56
AutomaticDimming...............56
ExteriorFolding.................58
Heated ...................56,58
Memory ....................37
Outside ...................56,57
Rearview .................56,241
Vanity .....................57
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........205
Mopar Parts....................317
MP3 Control ....................80
Multi-Function Control Lever.............62
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............126
O
Occupant Restraints ................207
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ........310,313
Oil Change Indicator ................105
Reset.....................105
Oil, Engine ..................269, 313
Capacity ...................312
Checking ...................268
Dipstick ....................268
Disposal ...................269
Filter .....................270
Filter Disposal .................269
Identification Logo ...............269
Materials Added To ..............269
Pressure Warning Light ............112
Recommendation ............269, 312
Synthetic ...................269
Viscosity ...................312
Oil Filter, Change .................270
Oil Filter, Selection.................270
Oil Pressure Light .................112
Onboard Diagnostic System ............117
Operating Precautions ...............117
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................318
Outside Rearview Mirrors ............56,57
Overheating, Engine ................259
P
Paint Care ....................306
Parking Brake ...................126
ParkSense
FrontAndRear ................145
ParkSense Active Park Assist ...........149
ParkSense System, Rear..............145
Passive Entry ....................31
Pedestrian Warning System ............195
Pets .......................238
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......294
Power
Brakes ....................309
Inverter.....................83
Mirrors.....................57
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........81
Seats ....................49, 50
Steering ....................134
Power Seats
Down......................49
Forward ....................49
Rearward....................49
Up.......................49
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch ...............34,88
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..........213
Preparation For Jacking ..............244
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................213
Q
Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module (QVPM) ......195
324 INDEX
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................298
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....277,280
Radio Operation..................193
Radio Remote Controls ..............185
Rear Air Conditioning ..............71,75
RearCamera...................155
RearCrossPath..................201
Rear ParkSense System ..............145
Rear Seat Entertainment .............185
Rear Seat Reminder ................198
RearView .....................56
Reclining Front Seats ................39
Recreational Towing ................167
Reformulated Gasoline ..............310
Refrigerant ....................271
Release, Hood ...................87
Reminder, Lights On ................62
Reminder, Seat Belt ................208
Remote Control
Starting System ...............25, 27
Remote Keyless Entry
ArmTheAlarm .................30
Disarm The Alarm ................30
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......185
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...........26, 28
Remote Starting System ............25, 27
Replacement Bulbs ................289
Replacement Tires ................299
Reporting Safety Defects..............317
Restraints, Child..................225
Restraints, Head ..................53
Roof Luggage Rack .................95
Rotation, Tires ..................304
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............238
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........239
Safety Defects, Reporting .............317
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................240
SafetyInformation,Tire..............291
SafetyTips....................238
Schedule, Maintenance ..............264
Screen Setup ...................108
Seat Belt Reminder ................113
Seat Belts ..................208, 238
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............211
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....211
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .211
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......214
Child Restraints ................225
Energy Management Feature .........213
Extender ...................213
Front Seat .............208, 209, 210
Inspection ..................238
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..........210
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............209
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........210
Operating Instructions .............210
Pregnant Women ...............213
Pretensioners .................213
Rear Seat ...................209
Reminder ...................208
Seat Belt Extender ...............213
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............213
Untwisting Procedure .............210
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............307
Seats....................38,49,52
Adjustment ...............38, 39, 49
Heated .....................52
Memory ....................37
Power ...................49,50
Rear Folding ..................38
Reclining....................39
Seatback Release .............38, 39
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ............45
Tilting ...................38, 39
Security Alarm...................113
Arm The System ................30
Disarm The System ...............30
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........313
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............22
Service Assistance ................315
Service Contract..................317
Service Manuals .................318
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ............129
Shoulder Belts ..................209
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............56
Signals, Turn ............62,
116, 239, 290
SmartBeams ....................63
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............302
SnowTires....................300
Spare Tire Changing ................244
Spare Tires ...............244,300, 301
Spare Tire Stowage ................250
Specifications
Oil ......................313
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............141
Cancel ....................138
Resume ....................138
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........138
Starting ...............25, 27, 119, 122
Button .....................23
Cold Weather .................122
Engine Fails To Start ..............121
Remote...................25, 27
Starting And Operating ............119,122
Starting Procedures .............119,122
INDEX 325
11
Steering .....................134
TiltColumn...................36
Wheel, Heated .................36
Wheel, Tilt ...................36
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........185
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .185
Storage ......................77
Storage, Vehicle ..................76
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ...........45
Stow‘nVac.....................91
Streaming.....................185
Stuck, Freeing...................261
Sunglasses Storage.................77
SunRoof....................85,87
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....217
Surround View Camera ..............155
Sway Control, Trailer ................199
Symbol Glossary ...................8
Synthetic Engine Oil ................269
System, Remote Starting ............25, 27
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............36
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........76
Tilt Steering Column ................36
Time Delay
Headlight ....................62
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......294
TireMarkings...................291
Tires ...............239, 297, 300, 304
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............299
Air Pressure ..................297
Chains ....................302
Changing ...................244
Compact Spare ................300
General Information ...........297,300
High Speed ..................298
Inflation Pressure ...............297
Jacking .................244,245
LifeOfTires..................299
Load Capacity .................294
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .105, 115, 205
Quality Grading ................304
Radial ....................298
Replacement .................299
Rotation ...................304
Safety..................291,297
Sizes .....................292
SnowTires ..................300
Spare Tires .............244,300, 301
Spinning ...................298
TrailerTowing.................165
Tread Wear Indicators .............298
Wheel Nut Torque ...............309
TireSafetyInformation ..............291
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
........250
TireStowage...................250
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........164
To Open Hood ...................87
Towing....................160,166
Disabled Vehicle ................261
Guide.....................162
Recreational .................167
Weight ....................162
Towing Behind A Motorhome ............167
Traction ......................168
Traction Control ..................199
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............199
TrailerTowing ................160,166
Hitches ....................162
Minimum Requirements ............164
Tips......................166
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........164
Wiring.....................165
TrailerTowingGuide................162
TrailerWeight...................162
Transaxle
Automatic ................128, 131
Operation ................128, 131
Transmission ...................129
Automatic ................129, 281
Maintenance .................281
Transporting Pets .................238
Tread Wear Indicators ...............298
Turn Signals ...............62,116,290
U
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display.....169
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .......31
Passive Entry Programming ...........31
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............304
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
................59
Unleaded Gasoline ................310
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........210
USB........................80
V
Vacuum ......................91
Stow‘nVac...................91
VanityMirrors....................57
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........309
Vehicle Loading ...............160,294
Vehicle Maintenance ...............269
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........8
Vehicle Storage ...................76
Ventilated Seats ..................53
Voice Commands
...............55
326 INDEX
W
Warning Lights
Red......................111
Yellow.....................113
Warning Lights And Messages ...........111
Warranty Information
.............317
Washers, Windshield ...............268
Washing Vehicle..................306
Water
Driving Through ................168
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............301
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.............301
WindBuffeting...................85
Window Fogging ..................76
Windows......................84
Power .....................84
Windshield Defroster ...............239
Windshield Washers..............66,268
Fluid .....................268
Windshield Wiper Blades .............273
Wipers Blade Replacement ............273
Wipers,Intermittent.................66
Wireless Charging Pad ...............83
Wrecker Towing ..................261
INDEX 327
11
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual
for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US
LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall
be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important
features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio
Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website
on the back cover.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are
less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking,
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a
cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-800-247-9753
or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
First Edition
24_RUP_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app,
select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler”
(U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
U.S.
mopar.com/om
2024 CHRYSLER PACIFICA OWNER’S MANUAL
2024 PACIFICA
